Micom P630C: Transformer Differential Protection Device

MiCOM P630C
Transformer Differential Protection Device
P630C/EN M/B31
Version P630C -301 -401 -601

P630C -301 -401 -602
P630C -301 -401 -603
Technical Manual
Content P630C/EN M/C11 (-601)

P630C/EN AD/C21 (-602)
P630C/EN AD/A31 (-603)
MiCOM P630C
P630C/EN M/C11
Version P630C -301 -401 -601
Technical Manual
Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before any work is done in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded
conductors are used, wire end ferrules must be employed.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
! are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being
connected;
! are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to
energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
! are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
! are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the
manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of
questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate
Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric
including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which
is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
Modifications After Going to Press
Contents
1 Application and Scope 1-1
2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformityt 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-2
2.3.1 Type Tests 2-2
2.3.2 Routine Tests 2-4
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-4
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-4
2.6 Interfaces 2-6
2.7 Information Output 2-7
2.8 Settings 2-7
2.9 Typical Characteristic Data 2-8
2.10 Deviations 2-8
2.10.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-8
2.10.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-9
2.10.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-9
2.11 Recording Functions 2-10
2.12 Dimensioning of Current Transformers 2-11
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7

Contents
(continued)
3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-2
3.3 Configuring the Measured Value (Function Group LOC) 3-3
Panels
3.4 Serial Interfaces 3-6
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) 3-6
3.4.2 "Logical" (Function Group COMM1) 3-8
Communication Interface 1
3.5 Time Synchronization via the (Function Group IRIGB) 3-24
IRIG-B Interface
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) 3-25
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group INP) 3-27
of the Binary Inputs
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, (Function Group OUTP) 3-28
and Blocking of the Output Relays
3.9 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group LED) 3-31
of the LED Indicators
3.10 Main Functions of the P630C (Function Group MAIN) 3-33
3.10.1 Conditioning the Measured 3-33
Variables
3.10.2 Operating Data Measurement 3-35
3.10.3 Configuring and Enabling the 3-43
Protection Functions
3.10.4 Activation of Dynamic Parameters 3-45
3.10.5 Multiple Blocking 3-45
3.10.6 Blocked / Faulty 3-47
(OUT OF SERVICE)
3.10.7 Starting Signals and 3-48
Tripping Logic
3.10.8 Time Tagging and Clock 3-52
Synchronization
3.10.9 Resetting Mechanisms 3-53
3.10.10 Test Mode 3-54
3.11 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) 3-55
3.12 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) 3-57
3.13 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) 3-59
3.14 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) 3-60
3.15 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) 3-61
3.16 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) 3-64
3.17 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) 3-67
3.18 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) 3-75
8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

Contents
(continued)
3.19 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) 3-81

3.20 Definite-Time Overcurrent (Function Groups DTOC1 3-101
Protection und DTOC2)
3.21 Inverse-Time Overcurrent (Function Groups IDMT1 3-111
Protection und IDMT2)
3.22 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THRM1) 3-127
3.23 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 3-134
und MCM_2)
3.24 Limit Value Monitoring of the (Function Groups LIM_1 3-136
Phase Currents und LIM_2)
3.25 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) 3-138
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9

Contents
(continued)
4 Design 4-1
5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version 5-1
5.3 Location Requirements 5-2
5.4 Installation 5-3
5.5 Protective Grounding 5-6
5.6 Connection 5-7
5.6.1 Connecting the Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-7
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface 5-11
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-11
6 Local Control Panel 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Illumination of the Display 6-6
6.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx 6-6
6.4 Changing Between Display Levels 6-8
6.5 Control at the Panel Level 6-9
6.6 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-10
6.6.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree 6-10
6.6.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-11
6.6.3 Change-Enabling Function 6-12
6.6.4 Changing Parameters 6-15
6.6.5 Setting a List Parameter 6-16
6.6.6 Memory Readout 6-18
6.6.7 Resetting 6-22
6.6.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-24
6.6.9 Changing the Password 6-25
7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Device Identification 7-1
7.2 Configuration Parameters 7-4
7.3 Function Parameters 7-25
7.3.1 Global 7-25
7.3.2 General Functions 7-29
7.3.3 Parameter Subsets 7-38
10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

Contents
(continued)
8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Cyclic Values 8-1
8.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-1
8.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-7
8.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-9
8.2 Control and Testing 8-19
8.3 Operating Data Recording 8-22
8.4 Event Counters 8-23
8.5 Measured Fault Data 8-24
8.6 Event Recording 8-26
9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions 9-1
9.2 Commissioning Tests 9-3
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
11 Maintenance 11-1
12 Storage 12-1
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1
14 Order Information 14-1
Appendix
A Glossary
B Signal List
C Terminal Connection Diagrams
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 11

12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
1 Application and Scope
The MiCOM P630C differential protection device is intended for the fast and selective
short-circuit protection of transformers, motors and generators.
General functions
The transformer differential protection device P630C has the following main functions:
! Three-system differential protection

" Amplitude and vector group matching
" Zero-sequence current filtering for each winding, may be deactivated individually
for each end
" Triple-slope tripping characteristics
" Harmonic restraint with second harmonic component, optionally with or without
global effects, may be deactivated
" Overfluxing restraint with fifth harmonic component, may be deactivated
" Through-stabilization with saturation discriminator
! Definite-time overcurrent protection, three stages, phase-selective, separate
measuring systems for phase currents, negative-sequence current and residual
current
! Inverse-time overcurrent protection, single-stage, phase-selective, separate
measuring systems for phase currents, negative-sequence current and residual
current
! Thermal overload protection, choice of relative or absolute thermal replica
! Measuring circuit monitoring
! Limit value monitoring
! Programmable logic
All main functions are individually configurable and can be disabled or enabled by the
user as desired. By means of a straight-forward configuration procedure, the user can
adapt the device flexibly to the scope of protection required in each particular
application. Due to the powerful, freely configurable logic of the device, special
applications can be accommodated.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 1-1

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the features listed above, as well as comprehensive self-monitoring, the
following global functions are available in the MiCOM P630C differential protection
device:
! Parameter subset selection

! Measured operating data to support the user during commissioning, testing and
operation
! Operating data recording (time-tagged signal logging)
! Overload data acquisition
! Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)
! Fault data acquisition
! Fault recording (time-tagged signal logging with fault value recording of the phase
currents of both windings)
Design
The P630C is compact in design. The printed circuit boards are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via ribbon cables. The P630C has a
multifunctional case design that is equally well suited to either wall surface mounting or
flush panel mounting due to its reversible terminal blocks and adjustable mounting
bracket.
Inputs and outputs

The P630C has the following inputs and outputs:
! 6 current-measuring inputs
! 2 binary signal inputs (optical couplers) with user-definable function assignment
! 8 output relays with user-definable function assignment
The nominal currents of the measuring inputs in the P630C can be set.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC without
internal switching. The auxiliary voltage for the power supply can be switched internally
from 110 to 250 V DC, 100 to 230 V AC to the range 24 to 60 V DC.
All output relays are suitable for both signals and commands.
1-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Interfaces
Local control and display:
! Local control panel

! 17 LED indicators, 12 of which allow freely configurable function assignment
! PC interface
! One or two communication interfaces for connection to a substation control system
(optional)
! One InterMiCOM guidance interface designed for real-time signal transmission

between two MiCOM devices (optional)
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or the
optional communication interfaces.
One channel of the communication interfaces is designed to conform either to

international standard IEC 60870-5-103 or to IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0 or
Courier. The second channel is designed to conform to international standard
IEC 60870-5-103. The P630C can be integrated into a substation control system through
the communication interfaces.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 1-3

(continued)
The following function groups are provided in the P630C differential protection devices.
For a detailed description of these function groups, see Chapter 3.
COMM1: “Logical“ communication interface 1

DIFF: Differential protection
DTOC1: Definite-time overcurrent protection 1
DVICE: Device
FT_DA: Fault data acquisition
FT_RC: Fault recording
F_KEY: Function keys
IDMT1: Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1
INP: Binary inputs
IRIGB: IRIG-B interface
LED: LED indicators
LIM_1: Limit value monitoring 1
LOC: Local control panel
LOGIC: Logic
MAIN: Main functions
MCM_1: Measuring-circuit monitoring 1
MT_RC: Monitoring signal recording
OL_DA: Overload data acquisition
OL_RC: Overload recording
OP_RC: Operating data recording
OUTP: Binary outputs
PC: PC link
PSS: Parameter subset selection
SFMON: Self-monitoring
THRM1: Thermal overload protection 1
1-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P630C Version - 301 - 401 - 601
Declaration of conformity
(Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.)
The product designated ‘P630C Transformer Differential Protection Device’ has been
designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6
and EN 60010-1 and with the ‘EMC Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage Directive’ issued by
the Council of the European Community.
2.2 General Data
General device data

Design
Multifunctional case design suitable for either wall surface mounting or flush panel
mounting
Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52.
Weight
Approx. 4.5 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5 and
Appendix C).
Terminals
PC Interface (X6):
DIN 41652 connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Communication Interface:
Optical fibers F-SMA fiber-optic connection
(X7, X8 and X31, X32): per IEC 874-2 orDIN 47258
for plastic fibre
or
ST fiber-optic connection
(ST is a registered trademark of
AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors)
for glass fibre
or
Leads (X9, X10 and X33): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections
up to 1.5 mm2.
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Other Inputs and Outputs (X1 and X3):

M4 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection, for conductor cross
sections from 0.5 to 6 mm2 or 2 x 2.5 mm2.
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1§ and IEC 664-1.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6§ or IEC 255-6.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022§ or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test

Per IEC 255 Part 22-1§ or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III.
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s
Source impedance: 200 Ω
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2§ or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3.
Contact discharge,
Single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3§ and ENV 50204,§ severity level 3.
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %
_______________________________________________________________
§
For this EN, ENV or IEC standard, the DIN EN, DINV ENV or DIN IEC edition,
respectively, was used in the test.
2-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per EN 61000-4-4§ or IEC 60255-22-4, severity levels 3 and 4.
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
Burst frequency: 5 kHz or 2.5 kHz
Surge Immunity Test
Per EN 61000-4-5§ or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4.

Testing of circuits for power supply and unsymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min
Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Test voltage: 10 V
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 255-11.
12 %.
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per DIN EN 61010 or IEC 255-5.
2 kV AC, 60 s.
Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 µs
Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV
Mechanical robustness
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1§ or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2§ or IEC 255-21-2, test severity class 1.
Acceleration: 5 g / 15 g
Pulse duration: 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3,§ test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle
2.3.2 Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6§ or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5.
2.5 kV AC, 1 s.
Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Limit temperature range: -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to 158°F)
Humidity
≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C (104°F), condensation not permissible.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measurement inputs
Current
Nominal current: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable).
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous: 4 Inom (20 A)
for 10 s: 30 Inom (150 A)
for 1 s: 100 Inom (500 A)
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom (1250 A)
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom.
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz
2-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Binary signal inputs

Nominal auxiliary voltage Vin,nom: 24 to 250 V DC.
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 Vin,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % Vin,nom
Operate value / Release Value (as per order)

Standard variant 18V:
Vop ≥ 19 V DC
Vrel ≤ 14 V DC
Special variant 90 V:
(60% to 70% of voltages in the range Vin,nom: 125 to 150 V DC)
Vop ≥ 100 V DC
Vrel ≤ 80 V DC
Special variant 155 V:
(60% to 70% of voltages in the range Vin,nom: 220 to 250 V DC)
Vop ≥ 180 V DC
Vrel ≤ 130 V DC
Power Consumption per Input:

Standard variant 18V:
Vin = 19 to 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %,
Vin > 110 V DC: Vin,nom • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Special variants 90 V and 155 V:

Vin,nom • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Output relays
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 5 A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms
4 A at 230 V AC and cos ϕ = 0.4
Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:
100 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC and 24 to 60 V DC (internal switching)
Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage:
0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal consumption:
Initial position: approx. 8 W
Active position: approx. 10 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time: ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Interfaces
Local control panel

Input or output:
Via 7 keys and an LCD display consisting of 4 x 20 characters and
4 freely configurable function keys
State and fault signals:

17 LED indicators (5 permanently assigned, 12 freely configurable)
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 bit/s (adjustable)
Communication interfaces
The communication unit can have three communication channels – depending on the
version. Channels 1 and 3 are designed for wire connection or fiber-optic connection,
whereas Channel 2 is intended for wire connection only.
Communication interface COMM1 (optional):

Per IEC 60870-5-103
or
protocol can be switched between IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0
and Courier.
Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 bit/s (adjustable)
Communication interface COMM2 (optional):

Per IEC 60870-5-103
Guidance interface COMM3 (optional):

InterMiCOM, asynchronous, vollduplex
Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged:
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
2-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wave length: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. –7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. –20 dBm
Optical input: max. –5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm
Optical output: min. –19.8 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm
Optical output: min. –16 dBm
1)
Distance to be bridged given identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends,
a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude-modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD-coded dating information
2.7 Information Output
Measured data, indications and counters: see Chapter 8 “Information and Control
Functions”
2.8 Settings
Device identification, configuration parameters and function parameters: see Chapter 7

“Settings”
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 Typical characteristic data
Main function
Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Differential protection
Operating time at Id = 10·Idiff> with harmonic blocking disabled or at Id > Idiff>>>:
min. 13 ms / typ. 15 ms
Operating time at Id = 2.5·Idiff> with harmonic blocking disabled:
Operating time at Id = 2.5·Idiff> with harmonic blocking enabled:
Starting resetting ratio of measuring system:
0.9 or 1.0 (adjustable)
Definite-time and
inverse-time
overcurrent protection
Operate time inclusive of output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Starting resetting ratio of starting element:
Set pickup value ≥ 0.3: approx. 0.95
Set pickup value < 0.3: approx. 0.92
2.10 Deviations
2.10.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
‘Reference Conditions’
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %,
ambient temperature 20 °C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
'Deviation'
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Differential protection
Measuring system for Id ≥ 0.2 Iref: ± 5 %
Inrush stabilization: ± 10 %
Definite-time and
inverse-time
Pickup values: ± 5 %
Thermal
overload protection
Pickup value Θ: ± 5 %
2-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
ambient temperature 20 °C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
'Deviation'
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Definite-time stages
Measuring current I greater 2-fold pickup value: ± 1 % + 10 ms
Inverse-time stages
Measuring current I greater 2-fold reference current: ± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
For IEC characteristic 'extremely inverse' and for thermal overload protection:
± 7.5 % + 10 to 25 ms
2.10.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
'Deviation'
Deviation relative to the corresponding nominal value under reference conditions.
Operating data
measurement
Measuring input currents: ± 1 %
Internally formed residual currents: ± 2 %
Internally formed differential and restraining currents: ± 2 %
Phase angle: ± 1 °
Fault data acquisition

Short-circuit currents: ± 3 %
Differential and restraining currents: ± 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min): ± 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: ± 1 ms
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.11 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating data memory

Scope: All signals relating to normal operation;
from a total of 1024 different logic state signals
Depth: The 100 most recent signals
Monitoring signal memory

Scope: All signals relating to self-monitoring;
Depth: Up to 30 signals
Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope: All signals relating to an overload event;

Depth: 200 entries per overload event
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent fault events
Scope for signals: All signals relating to a fault event;

Scope for fault values: Sampled data for all measured currents
Depth for signals: 200 entries per fault event
Depth for fault values: Max. number of periods per fault set by the user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is
16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
Resolution of the Recorded Data
Signals
Time resolution: 1 ms
Fault values
Time resolution: 20 sampled values per cycle
Phase currents
Dynamic range: 33 Inom
Amplitude resolution: 2.0 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 1 A

10.1 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 5 A
2-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Dimensioning of Current Transformers
The following equation is used for dimensioning a current transformer:
Vsal = nn ⋅ Isn ⋅ (R ct + R bn ) ≥ K d ⋅ K ssc ⋅ Isn ⋅ (R ct + R b )
where:
Vsal: Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
nn: Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
nb: Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT
Isn: Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT
Rct: Secondary winding resistance of the CT
Rbn: Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Rb: Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Kn: Rated transformation ratio of the CT
Kssc: Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
Kd: Dimensioning factor for the CT
The current transformer can be dimensioned for the minimum required secondary
accuracy limiting voltage acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.4:
Vsal ≥ K d ⋅ K ssc ⋅ Isn ⋅ (R ct + R b )
Alternatively, the current transformer can also be dimensioned for the minimum required
rated accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.3:
nn ≥ K d ⋅ K ssc ⋅
(R ct + Rb ) = K ⋅ K ⋅ (Pct + Pb )
(R ct + Rbn ) d ssc (Pct + Pbn )
The equivalent power quantities in the equation above are defined as follows:
2
Pct = R ct ⋅ Isn
2
Pbn = R bn ⋅ Isn
2
Pb = R b ⋅ Isn
The actual secondary connected burden Rb is given as follows:
! For phase-to-ground faults: R b = 2 ⋅ R l + R rel
! For phase-to-phase faults: R b = R l + R rel
where:
R l: One-way lead resistance from CT to relay
RRel: Resistive burden of relay’s CT input
Relay’s burden Rrel is considered to be less than 0.05 Ω.
The relation between secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.4 and
rated accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.3 is given as follows:
 P  P + Pbn
Vsal = nn ⋅  Isn ⋅ R ct + bn  = nn ⋅ ct

 Isn  Isn
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
The rated knee point voltage Vk acc. to IEC 60044-1-am1, 2.3.12 is lower than the
secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.4. It is not possible to
give a general relation between Vk and Vsal, but normally Vk may be considered to be
80 % to 85 % of Vsal.
For the differential protection of the P630C the dimensioning factor Kd for the CTs
considering external faults has been determined empirically:
K d = K emp for external faults (through-fault currents)
The diagram according to figure 2-1 represents the empirically determined dimensioning
factor Kemp as a function of the primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio) Xp/Rp.
4,5
3,5
Kem p 2,5
2
1,5
0,5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Xp/Rp
2-1 Empirically determined CT's dimensioning factor for differential protection
This CT requirement assures through fault stability of the differential element. Due to
saturation discriminator CT requirement is independent of the current sensitivity given by
the set basic threshold Idiff> of the tripping characteristic.
For the maximum fault current with an internal fault static saturation up to 4 times is
permissible. This corresponds to a dimensioning factor Kd of 0.25:
K d = 0.25 for internal faults
2-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure
The P630C, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. Figure 3-1
shows the basic hardware structure of the P630C.
3-1 Basic hardware structure
The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the
internal processing levels by input transformers and optical couplers. Commands and
signals generated by the device internally are transmitted to external destinations via
floating contacts. The external auxiliary voltage is connected to the power supply unit
which provides the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between operator
and device:
! Integrated local control panel

! PC interface
! Communication interface
All setting parameters and signals as well as all measured variables and control
functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
‘Parameters’ branch
This branch carries all settings, including the device identification data, the configuration
parameters for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the function parameters
for adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored in
non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if the power
supply fails.
‘Operation’ branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various control parameters are grouped here, for example
those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Events’ branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. Therefore all information
contained in this group is stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault records are stored here and can be read out
at a later time.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice. The Appendix documents the settings and signals of the P630C
in the form of an ‘address list’. This address list is complete and thus contains all
settings, signals and measured variables used with the P630C.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Measured Value Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions, operation during a ground fault, and
finally to operation following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P630C provides the
measured data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
3-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.3 Configuring the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)
The P630C provides Measured Value Panels that display the measured values relevant
at a given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. When an
event occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that
measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of an overload
event or a ground fault, the display will automatically switch back to the Operation Panel
at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the
LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at
least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select the measured operating values that will be displayed on the
Operation Panel by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are
selected for display than the LCD display can accommodate, the display will switch to
the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r
P a n e l s or when the appropriate keys on the local control panel are pressed.
3-2 Operation Panel
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LCD display can accommodate, the display will switch to the next set of values
at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the
appropriate keys on the local control panel are pressed.
3-3 Fault Panel
3-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The
Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this
case, the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LCD display can accommodate, the display will switch to the next set of values
at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the
appropriate keys on the local control panel are pressed.
3-4 Overload Panel
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4 Serial Interfaces
The P630C has a PC interface as a standard component. The communication unit is

optional and can have one or two communication channels – depending on the design
version. Communication between the P630C and the control station’s computer is
through the communication unit. Setting and readout are possible through all P630C
interfaces.
If the communication unit with two communication channels is installed, settings for two
"logical" communication interfaces will be available. The settings for "logical"
communication interface 1 (COMM1) can be assigned to physical communication
channels 1 or 2 (see section entitled 'Main Functions'). If the COMM1 settings have been
assigned to communication channel 2, then this means that the settings for "logical"
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication
channel 1. Communication with the P630C via communication channel 2 is only possible
when the PC interface is inactive. As soon as communication occurs through the PC
interface, communication channel 2 is "dead".
If tests are run on the P630C, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that the
PC or the control system will evaluate all incoming signals accordingly (see section
entitled 'General Functions').
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P630C and the PC to function, several settings must be made
in the P630C.
An operating program is available as an accessory for P630C control (see Chapter 13).
3-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-5 PC interface settings
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2 "Logical" Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
Depending on the design version of the communication unit (see Technical Data),
several interface protocols are available. The protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103 is
supported for all versions. The following user-selected interface protocols are available
for use with the P630C:
! IEC 60870-5-103, “Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment,’ first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW /
ZVEI Recommendation, “Protection communication companion standard 1,
compatibility level 2,” February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and
monitoring
! IEC 870-5-101, “Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,” first edition
1995-11
! ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
! MODBUS
! DNP 3.0
! COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the
P630C.
The communication interface can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a
signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
3-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11-S

3 Operation
(continued)
3-6 "Logical" communication interface 1: selecting the interface protocol
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)
3-7 "Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
3-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-8 "Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-9 "Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-10 "Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the MODBUS protocol
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)
3-11 "Logical" communication interface 1: settings for DNP 3.0
3-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 "Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the COURIER interface protocol
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signaling
For interface protocols per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C, there is the option
of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local control panel.
3-13 Checking spontaneous signaling
3-16 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
"Logical" communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made.
3-14 Settings for "logical" communication interface 2
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signaling
There is the option of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this
signal to the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
3-15 Checking spontaneous signaling
3-18 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Application and Scope

"Logical" communication interface 3 provides a digital communication link between two
MiCOM devices for the exchange of up to 8 binary protection signals. While "logical"
communication interfaces 1 and 2 are intended for data acquisition and remote access,
"logical" communication interface 3 is a "guidance interface" designed for real-time
signal transmission (the "InterMiCOM" interface). The primary application resides in the
exchange of signals associated with the PSIG (protective signaling) function. However,
the InterMiCOM interface can also be employed for the transmission of any other binary
signals internal or external to the device.
Hardware options
COMM3 is designed as asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface for the
following transmission options.
Direct link without any ancillary equipment:

! Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
! Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of ancillary transmission equipment:

! Fiber-optic module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
! Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
! Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
! Asynchronous data interface of a primary multiplexing equipment
Enabling
In order to use InterMiCOM, communication interface COMM3 has to be included in the
device configuration by way of the setting C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This
setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted.
After configuration of COMM3, all addresses associated with this function group (setting
parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function group can then be enabled or disabled at C O M M 3 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e
USER.
Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate can be set (at C O M M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) so as to meet the
transmission channel requirements. Source address (C O M M 3 : So u r c e a d d r e s s )
and receiving address (C O M M 3 : R e c e i vi n g a d d r e s s ) can be set to differing values
to prevent InterMiCOM communication internal to the device.
Using the InterMiCOM interface, eight independent binary signals can be transmitted in
each direction. For the assignment of functions to the send signals (C O M M 3 : F c t.
a s s i g n m . s e n d 1 , … ), any signal from the "Binary Outputs" selection table can be
selected. For the receive signals (C O M M 3 : F c t. a s s i g n m . r e c . 1 , … ), any signal
from the "Binary Inputs" selection table can be chosen.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set (C O M M 3 : O p e r .

m o d e r e c e i v e 1 , … ) thus defining the required checks for accepting the received
binary signal. The 8 signals are divided into two groups with differing choices for the
operating mode. The operating mode selected for the telegram check defines the relative
weighting of the conflicting target characteristics "Speed", Security" and Dependability"
as required for specific protection schemes.
! Binary signals 1 to 4:
Choice of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode.
! Binary signals 5 to 8:
Choice of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode.
EN 60834-1 classifies command based teleprotection schemes into 3 categories

according to their specific requirements. The following settings for the operating modes
are recommended for compliance with the requirements for the individual teleprotection
schemes:
! Direct transfer trip or intertripping:

Preference: Security.
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Operating mode Direct intertrip (groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8).
! Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximum probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Operating mode Permissive (groups 5 to 8).
! Blocking teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Speed.
Implication: Fast peer-to-peer signal transfer.
Recommended setting: Operating mode Blocking (groups 1 to 4).
3-20 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Speed
fast
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high high
Direct
Security Intertrip Dependability
3-16 Comparison of the operating modes
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)
Communication monitoring
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m .fa u l t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel. This timer is retriggered whenever a 100% valid telegram is
received. The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission
times. This is particularly important for time-critical schemes such as the blocking
scheme. After this timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals C O M M 3 :
C o m m u n i c a ti o n s fa u l t and SF M O N : C o m m u n i c .fa u l t C O M M 3 are issued
and the received signals are set to their user-defined default values (C O M M 3 : D e fa u l t
va l u e r e c . 1 , …), thus ensuring that the relay protection logic will continue to operate
in a pre-determined failsafe way. When the InterMiCOM interface is used in connection
with the PSIG (protective signaling) function, the alarm signals can be configured to the
corresponding PSIG input signals using the C O M M 3 : Si g .a s g . c o m m .fa u l t
setting.
C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k fa i l . is used to determine a persistent failure of the channel.

After this timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k fa i l u r e and
SF M O N : C o m m .l i n k fa i l .C O M M 3 are raised. These can be mapped to give the
operator a warning LED or contact, to indicate that maintenance attention is required.
Blocking Permissive Direct Trip

signals accepted signals accepted signals accepted
Character frame &

Telegram receive Telegram CRC
Message received Source address
check check
check
‚COMM3: Time-out
comm.fault'
t 0
‚COMM3:
(Re-)Trigger
Communications fault'
‚COMM3: Time-out
link fail.'
t 0
‚COMM3:
Comm. link failure'
3-17 Message processing and communication monitoring
3-22 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of
communication link quality
For each received message, InterMiCOM carries out a syntax check and updates the
proportion of corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages. These ratio
results are provided as continuously updated values (C O M M 3 : N o . te l . e r r o r s p .u .)
and as maximum value (C O M M 3 : N o . t . e r r . , m a x , s t o r e d ) . The user may declare the
percentage of corrupted messages that can be allowed compared to total messages
transmitted (C O M M 3 : L i m i t te l e g r . e r r o r s ), before an alarm is raised (C O M M 3 :
L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . and SF M O N : L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l . e r r . ). All corrupted
messages are counted (C O M M 3 : N o . te l e g r a m e r r o r s ). This counter as well as the
stored maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via C O M M 3 : R e s e t N o .
tel.errors.
Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C O M M 3 : Sta te s e n d 1 , … and C O M M 3 : Sta te r e c e i ve 1 , …).
In addition, InterMiCOM provides two test facilities for commissioning of the protection
interface.
For the loop back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input of the
same device. The test can be triggered via C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . The device
then sends the bit pattern (set as equivalent decimal number at C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k
s e n d ) for the preset time C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . Only for this test, the
source address is set to "0", a value that is not used for regular peer-to-peer
communication.
While the hold time is running, the test result can be checked by reading out the
measured operating data values C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C O M M 3 :
L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . Once the hold time has expired, the loop back test is terminated
and InterMiCOM reverts to the normal sending mode (i.e. sending the updated values of
the configured send signals, using the set source address).
Thus in case of communication problems, the loop back test can be used to verify or to
exclude a device malfunction. The transmission channel including the receiving device
can be checked manually by setting individual signals (C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r
te s t) to user-defined test values (C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the
test via C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset signal is sent with the preset value
for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d ti m e fo r te s t. The 7 remaining signals are not
affected by this test procedure and are sent with their updated values. During this time,
the received signal can be checked from the receiving device, e.g. by reading the
physical state signal. Once the hold time has expired, the test mode is reset
automatically and the updated values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)
3.5 Time Synchronization via the IRIG-B Interface (Function Group IRIGB)
If a GPS receiver with an IRIG-B connection is available, for example, then the internal
clock in the P630C can be synchronized to GPS time through the optional IRIG-B
interface. The user must keep in mind that the IRIG-B signal contains only one piece of
information about the date (the day as numbered since the beginning of the year). On
the basis of this piece of information about the date, the P630C calculates the current
date (DD.MM.YY) based on the year set in the P630C.
Disabling and enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Ready to synchronize
Once the IRIG-B interface has been enabled and is receiving a signal, the P630C
checks the received signal for plausibility. Non-plausible signals are rejected by the
P630C. If a correct signal is not received by the P630C continuously, then the
synchronization function is no longer ready.
3-18 IRIG-B interface
3-24 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P630C has four freely configurable function keys. Figure 3-19 illustrates their
operation using function key F1 as an example. This function key is not enabled unless
the associated password F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 has been entered first.
Once the password has been entered, the function key remains active for no longer than
the set time F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled
until the password is entered again. The same rules apply to function keys F2, F3 and
F4.
Configuring the function

keys with a single function
A single function can be assigned to each function key by selecting a logic state signal
(except L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T ) via F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1,
F2, F3 or F4). The selected signal will then be triggered in the P630C whenever the
relevant function key is pressed.
Configuring the function

keys using menu jump lists
Instead of a single function, a menu jump list can be assigned to each function key by
selecting the entry L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2) at F _ K E Y : F c t .
a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1, F2, F3 or F4). Repeated pressing of the relevant function key
will then sequentially trigger the functions of the selected menu jump list.
The two menu jump lists are composed via L O C : F c t. m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).
Up to 16 functions can be selected, including setting parameters, event counters and /or
event recordings.
Configuring the read key

At L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y u p to 16 functions can be selected from the same list as for
L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x . Repeated pressing of the read key will then
sequentially trigger the selected functions.
Operating mode of the

function keys
For each function key, the user can define an operating mode.
! Key mode: The selected function is active while the function key is being pressed.
! Switch mode: The status of the selected function will change between ‘enabled’ (On)
and ‘disabled’ (Off) whenever the function key is pressed.
The switching state of the function key can be displayed.
Key response
If the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, pressing a function key or the read
key will initially result in switching on the backlighting. Pressing the key a second time
will then trigger the selected function (as for the other keys).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)
3-19 Configuration and operating mode of the function keys. The associated function can be a single function or a menu jump list.
3-26 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P630C has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The
functions that will be activated in the P630C by triggering these binary signal inputs are
defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The trigger signal must persist for
at least 30 ms in order to be recognized by the P630C.
Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.

binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a
voltage should be interpreted as the logic '1' signal. The display of the state of a binary
signal input – 'low' or 'high' – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the
signal input.
3-20 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P630C has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signals to be
issued are defined by configuration.
Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay. The operating mode
determines whether the output relay will operate in an energize-on-signal (ES) mode or
normally-energized (NE) mode and whether it will operate in latching mode.
Depending on the I/O module under consideration, the output relays have either make
contacts, changeover contacts or both (see the Terminal Connection Diagrams in the
Appendix). For relays with make contacts, the energize-on-signal (ES) mode
corresponds to normally-open operation. The normally-energized (NE) mode means that
the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay
normally-closed. For relays with changeover contacts, these more common descriptions
are not applicable.
Latching is disabled manually from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input either at the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new
system disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected.
Blocking the output relays

The P630C offers the option of blocking all output relays from the local control panel or
by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs. In such
cases, the relays are treated according to their operating mode. They are not triggered if
they are in energize-on-signal (ES) mode; only relays in normally-energized (NE) mode
are triggered.
An exception is made for those relays that have the signals SFMON: Warning (relay) or
M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y assigned to them. Thereby the blocking is indicated
correctly.
(The signal M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty is coupled to the activation of the LED labeled
'OUT OF SERVICE'.)
If, on the other hand, a serious hardware error has been detected by the self-monitoring
function (see the error messages leading to blocking according to Chapter 10) then all
output relays are reset whatever the set operating mode or signal configuration.
3-28 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-21 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via the local
control panel. Triggering persists for the duration of the set hold time.
3-22 Testing the output relays
3-30 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P630C has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Five of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to functions. The other LED indicators are freely
configurable.
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the freely configurable LED indicators. The
same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators by configuration.
Operating mode of the LED

indicators
The user can set an operating mode for each LED indicator – with the exception of the
first one. The operating mode determines whether the LED indicator will operate in an
energize-on-signal arrangement (ES, ‘open-circuit principle’) or normally energized
arrangement (NE, ‘closed-circuit principle’) and whether it will operate in latching mode.
Latching is disabled manually from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input (see section entitled 'Main Functions of the P630C') either
at the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new system disturbance, depending on
the operating mode selected.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)
3-23 Configuration and operating mode of the LED indicators
3-32 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Main Functions of the P630C (Function Group MAIN)
3.10.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables
The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P630C. The
measured variables are – electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics
levels. Air-gap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress aperiodic
signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further
processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P630C to nominal
quantities. For this purpose, the user must set the secondary nominal currents of the
system transformers.
The connection arrangement of the measuring circuits must be set in the P630C.
Figure 3-24 shows the standard connection. The phase of the digitized currents is
rotated 180° by this setting.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-24 Anschluß der Meßkreise des P630C.
3-34 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.2 Operating Data Measurement
The P630C has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured by the P630C during normal power system operation; quantities
derived from these measured values are also displayed. For the display of measured
values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower thresholds are not
exceeded, the value not measured is displayed. The following measured variables are
displayed:
! Phase currents of all three phases of both ends of the transformer

! Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
! Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer
! Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
! Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer
! Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a general
starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values

The measured values for the current are displayed both as quantities referred to the
nominal current of the P630C and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the transformers connected to the P630C needs
to be set.
3-36 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-25 Measured operating data for the phase currents, ends a and b
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)
Delayed maximum phase

current display
The P630C offers the option of delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents. The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the
maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in Figure 3-26). At M A I N : S e t t l . t .
I P , m a x , d e l the user can set the time after which the delayed maximum phase current
display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max.
Stored maximum phase

current display
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-26). At M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d the
user can set the stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed
maximum phase current (see lower curve in Figure 3-26).
3-38 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-26 Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)
3-27 Measured operating data for the residual currents, ends a and b
3-40 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Angle determination
The P630C determines the angle between the following currents if the associated
currents exceed the lower threshold of 0.033 Inom:
! Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer
! Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer
3-28 Determination of the angle between the phase currents
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)
3-29 Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends
3-42 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.3 Configuration and Enabling the Protection Functions
By means of a straight-forward configuration procedure, the user can adapt the unit
flexibly to the range of functions required in each particular high voltage substation. By
including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all
others, the user creates an individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters,
signals and measured values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the
local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording
(OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be canceled.
Canceling a protection
function
The following conditions have to be met before a protection function can be canceled:
! The protection function must be disabled.

! None of the functions of the protection function to be canceled may be assigned to a
binary input.
! None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or to
an LED indicator.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration Parameters branch of
the menu tree to access the setting parameter relevant for the device function to be
canceled. If you wish to cancel the LIMIT function group, for example, access the setting
parameter L I M I T : F u n c t i o n g r o u p L I M I T and set its value to Without. Should
you wish to re-include the function group in the device configuration, set the value to
With.
The assignment of a parameter, a signal or a measured value to a protection function is

defined by a function group descriptor such as ‘LIMIT’. In the description of the
protection functions later in this manual, the protection function being described is
presumed to be included in the configuration.
Disabling and enabling the

protection function
Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a
function parameter or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or
enabled through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T and
M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When only one or
neither of the two functions is configured, this is interpreted as ‘Protection externally
enabled’. If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible, as for
example when they both have a logic value of ‘1,’ then the last plausible state remains
stored in memory.
Hinweis! Wird der Schutz über den auf G R U N D : S c h u t z a u s s c h . E X T

konfigurierten binären Signaleingang ausgeschaltet, erfolgt keine Meldung
GRUND: Blockade/Störung.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)
3-30 Enabling or disabling protection
3-44 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.4 Activation of Dynamic Parameters
For several of the protection functions, it is possible to switch the duration of the set hold
time to other settings - the "dynamic parameters" – through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, the switching is effective while the binary
signal input is being triggered.
3-31 Activation of dynamic parameters
3.10.5 Multiple Blocking
Four multiple blockings may be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. The items available
for selection are found in the Address List. Thereby the functions defined by the
selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)
3-32 Multiple blocking
3-46 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.6 Blocked / Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by a steady light from
yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and also by a signal through the
output relay configured for M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty. In addition, the user can select
the functions that will produce the M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty signal by setting an ‘m out
of n’ parameter.
3-33 ‘Blocked/faulty’ signal
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.7 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
Starting signals
The trip signals of differential protection and ground differential protection (Br: Restricted
earth fault protection) plus the general startings of the definite-time and inverse-time
overcurrent protection are combined into one common general starting.
3-34 General starting of the P630C
3-48 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of starting signals

The starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
3-35 Counter of general starting signals
Trip command
The P630C has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected by
setting an 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the four trip commands. The
minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the
conditions for the signal are satisfied.
Manual trip command

A manual trip command may be issued via the local control panel or a signal input
configured accordingly. It is not executed, however, unless the manual trip is included in
the selection of possible functions to effect a trip.
Latching of the trip

commands
For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate
setting whether it will operate in latching mode. If the latching mode is selected, the trip
command persists until it is reset from the local control panel or via an appropriately
configured binary signal.
Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands may be blocked via the integrated local control panel or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The blocking is effective for all four trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by the blocking. If the trip commands are
blocked this is indicated by a steady light at yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control
panel and by an output relay configured to ‘Blocked/faulty’. (To identify H2, see the
dimensional drawings in the Chapter entitled ‘Design’.)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)
3-36 Formation of the trip commands
3-50 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of trip commands

The trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a
group.
3-37 Counter of trip commands
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.8 Time Tag and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date-and time-tagged. For correct tagging, date and time need to be
set at the P630C.
Via an appropriately configured binary signal input, the time of different devices may be
synchronized by means of a pulse. The P630C evaluates the rising edge. This is used to
set the clock to the next full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end
signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), the last edge is evaluated.
3-38 Date and time setting and clock synchronization
3-52 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.9 Resetting Mechanisms
Stored data such as event logs, fault values etc, can be cleared in a number of ways.
The following mechanisms are available:
! Automatic resetting of the event signals indicated by LED indicators (provided that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel whenever a new event occurs.
! Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data on the local control panel by
pressing the reset key (‘Clear’ key ‘C’) located on the panel
! Selective resetting of a particular memory type (only the fault memory, for example)
from the local control panel or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs
! General reset
In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control panel are cleared
but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
power supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-39 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.10 Test Mode
If tests are run on the P630C, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be marked accordingly.
3-40 Setting the test mode
3-54 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
With the P630C, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.
Selecting the parameter

subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function parameter or external
signal input) may be selected via the function parameter P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R
or via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the
parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function parameter
P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals. The
parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the
logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .
Selecting the parameter

subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P630C
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function parameter will be active. The P630C also checks to determine whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset
selection. This is only true when just one binary signal input is set to a logic value of ‘1’. If
more than one signal input is set to a logic value of ‘1’, then the parameter subset
previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval occur while switching
between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic value
of ‘0’), then the stored energy time is started. While this timer stage is running, the
previously selected parameter subset remains active. As soon as a signal input has a
logic value of ‘1’, the associated parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored
energy time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic value of ‘1’, the
parameter subset selected via a function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic value of ‘1’ is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter
subset selected via a function parameter will become active once the stored energy time
has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored energy
timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When subset
selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately
100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)
3-41 Activating the parameter subsets
3-56 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P630C ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.
Tests during startup

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P630C. If the P630C detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No
control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P630C can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Signaling
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured SF M O N :
W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
3-42 Monitoring signals
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P630C to monitoring signals takes one of the following forms
depending on the signal.
! Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
! Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection
of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
! Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart, for example a fault in the hardware, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any startup, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A
warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart
sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces
will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered
by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but
communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
! Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed in the checksum test during self-
monitoring, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the
protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is corrupt. A cold
restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means that all
the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart. The settings that
then apply are shown underlined in the column ‘Range of Values’ in the Address List
(see Appendix). In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been
selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that
triggered the cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the
monitoring signal memory.
3-58 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a

non-volatile ring memory is provided. The operationally relevant signals, each fully
tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological
order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function
disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of
events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, ground faults, or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory
can be cleared.
Counter of signals relevant

to system operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
3-43 Operating data recording and the counter of signals relevant to system operation
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. A listing of all possible entries in this monitoring signal
memory is given in the address list (see Appendix). The memory depth allows for a
maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the protection device are always
entered in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select
this option by setting an 'm out of n' parameter (see Self-Monitoring).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry is indicated by a
flashing light.
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not even cleared automatically if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle has a negative result. The contents of the monitoring signal
memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication
interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read
out through the PC or communication interface or from the local control panel.
Counter of monitoring
signals
The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s . counter.
3-44 Monitoring signal recording and the counter of monitoring signals
3-60 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
In the event of an overload, the P630C determines the following measured overload
data:
! Overload duration
! Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the thermal
overload protection function THRM1. For this function, the following values are
determined:
" Status of the thermal replica
" Load current
" Object temperature
" Time remaining before trip
" Offset of the thermal replica
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the overload

duration
The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C :
R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-45 Overload duration
3-62 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the
measured overload data of
thermal overload protection
The measured overload data are derived from the measured operating data of the
thermal overload protection function. They are stored at the end of the overload event.
3-46 Measured overload data of thermal overload protection 1 (THRM1)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording

An overload exists, and therefore overload recording begins, if the signal T H R M 1 :
S t a r t i n g k * I B > is issued.
Counting overload events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential number.
3-47 Counting overload events
3-64 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tag
The date that is assigned to each overload event by the internal clock is stored. An
overload event’s individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal
clock. The date and time assigned to the overload events when the event begins can be
read out from the overload memory at the local control panel or through the PC and ILSA
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload event) that is
assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_ R C : O ve r l . m e m .
o ve r fl o w will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data are also entered in the overload
memory.
The overload recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)
3-48 Overload memory
3-66 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a fault in the power system, the P630C collects the following measured
fault data:
! Running time
! Fault duration
! Fault currents
! Differential current of all three measuring systems
! Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current
! Restraining current of all three measuring systems
Running time and fault
duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal that is generated within the P630C, and the fault duration is defined as the time
between the start and end of the F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-49 Running time and fault duration
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time

The P630C determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a
fault. Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the
determination of the recording start time is selected by the P630C. If, for example, the
differential protection function detects a fault then the P630C determines the measured
fault data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was
measured. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several
protection functions detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the
priorities given in the table below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P630C.
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion

1 Differential protection function Maximum differential current
2 Definite-time overcurrent protection Maximum restraining current
or
inverse-time overcurrent protection
3 Functions according to the selection End of fault
through m out of n parameters
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is
determined by the P630C and displayed.
3-68 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-50 Determination of the fault data acquisition time
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the fault

currents
The P630C stores the fault current data determined at the acquisition time. The following
fault currents are stored:
! The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer

! The residual current calculated from the phase currents
The fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom.
3-70 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-51 Acquisition of the fault currents
Acquisition of the
differential and restraining
currents
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)
The P630C stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the
acquisition time by the differential protection function. Moreover, the values for the
second and fifth harmonic of the differential current are stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.
3-72 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-52 Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data reset

After pressing the reset key ‘R’ on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as ‘Not measured’. However, the values are not erased and can continue to be
read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3-74 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
Start of fault recording

A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the signals selected
through an m out of n parameter is present. Moreover, fault recording is started if the Id>
and IR> triggers operate. Furthermore, fault recording can also be started manually from
the local control panel or externally through a binary signal input.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential number.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)
3-53 Start of fault recording and fault counter
3-76 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tag
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory at the
local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time
information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be
retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault logging
Protection signals during a fault, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and
post-fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A
total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored
in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been logged, the oldest fault
record will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then F T _ R C : F a u l t
m e m . o ve r fl o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed
during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C : F a u l ty ti m e ta g is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data are also entered in the fault
memory.
The fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)
3-54 Fault memory
3-78 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
! The phase currents of both ends of the transformer

The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The times for recording before
and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for
60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight
faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-
fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then
recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise; the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are
overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the
last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)
3-55 Fault data recording
3-80 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF)
The P630C is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the protection of
motors and generators and of other two-winding arrangements.
For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude matching is

required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power - generally the
nominal power of the transformer - and of the primary nominal voltages for all windings
of the transformer.
Vector group matching is achieved by the straightforward input of the relevant vector
group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence current filtering may
be deactivated. For conditions where it is possible to load the transformer with a voltage
in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing restraint prevents inappropriate tripping.
For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, the harmonic
restraint (inrush compensation) can be deactivated. The start-up of directly switched
asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential protection due to transient
transformer saturation caused by a displacement of the start-up current for relatively high
primary time constants. Even under these unfavorable measurement conditions, the
P630C exhibits an excellent stable performance due to the application of a saturation
discriminator.
All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current
transformers are connected to the P630C in standard configuration (see Conditioning of
the Measured Variables). In particular, the application as transformer differential
protection device presupposes that winding ‘a’ corresponds to the high voltage side of
the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings must be
selected (see Chapter 7).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling
differential protection
Differential protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover,
enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
3-56 Enabling or disabling differential protection
3-82 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Amplitude matching
In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power -
identical for all windings - needs to be defined. For two-winding arrangements, the
nominal power will usually be the reference power. The individual reference currents for
each winding of the protected object are then calculated by the P630C on the basis of
the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
Sref Sref
IB,a = IB,b =
3 ⋅ Vnom,a 3 ⋅ Vnom,b
with
Sref : reference power

Iref,a or b : reference current of winding a or b
Vnom,a or b : nominal voltage of winding a or b
The P630C calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and
the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
Inom,a Inom,b
k am,a = k am,b =
Iref ,a Iref ,b
with
kam,a or b: amplitude-matching factor of winding a or b

Inom,a or b: primary nominal currents of the main current transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P630C.
The P630C checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their
permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions:
! The matching factors must always be ≤ 16.

! The value of the lower matching factor must be ≥ 0.5.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)
Should the P630C calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the
above conditions then a warning will be issued and the P630C will be blocked
automatically.
The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are
multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing.
Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the
relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the
nominal currents of the device.
3-84 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
kam,a > 16
kam,b > 16
kmax-1
kmax-1 < 0.5

inv.
3-57 Calculating and checking the matching factors
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)
3-58 Amplitude matching
3-86 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Vector group matching

Vector group matching means that the low voltage-side currents are rotated with respect
to the high voltage-side currents according to the vector group of the transformer to be
protected. Thereby, phase coincidence with the high voltage-side currents is restored.
With the P630C, this is achieved by calculating the relevant vector difference or where
appropriate, by sign inversion for the low voltage-side phase currents (end b). Care must
be taken to avoid distortion of the amplitude matching by this operation. For all odd
vector groups, this is achieved by means of the factor 1/ 3 . Using vector diagrams, it
can be shown that the operations listed in the following table will lead to phase
coincidence of the high and low voltage-side currents while maintaining the amplitude
matching. In Figure 3-59, such a vector diagram is depicted for a transformer having the
vector group Yd5 as an example. By subtraction of each phase current from the
cyclically leading phase current and subsequent multiplication by the factor 1/ 3 , the
desired matching is achieved.
3-59 Vector diagram for vector group matching with a transformer having the vector group Yd5
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)
The following table lists the required operations for all vector groups that may occur. The
indices in the formulae have the following meaning:
am: amplitude-matched
s: amplitude- and vector group-matched
x: phase A, B or C
y: measuring system 1, 2 or 3
z: winding a, b, c or d
x+1: cyclically trailing phase
x-1: cyclically leading phase
Zero-sequence filtering may be deactivated separately for each winding. In case of

actived zero-sequence filtering the equations are as follows:
End ID of the vector group I s , y ,z =
a I am,x,a − I am,0,a
0 I am,x,z − I am,0,z
1 1
[
⋅ I am,x,z − I am,x +1,z ]
3
2 I am,0,z − I am,x +1,z
3 1
[
⋅ I am,x −1,z − I am,x +1,z ]
3
4 I am,x −1,z − I am,0,z
b 5 1
[
⋅ I am,x −1,z − I am,x,z ]
3
6 I am,0,z − I am,x,z
7 1
[
⋅ I am,x +1,z − I am,x,z ]
3
8 I am,x +1,z − I am,0,z
9 1
[
⋅ I am,x +1,z − I am,x −1,z ]
3
10 I am,0,z − I am,x −1,z
11 1
[
⋅ I am,x,z − I am,x −1,z ]
3
3-88 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
In case of deactived zero-sequence filtering the equations are as follows:
End ID of the vector group I s , y ,z =
a I am,x,a
0 I am,x,z
1 1
[ ]
⋅ I am,x,z − I am,x +1,z + I am,0,z
3
2 I am,0,z
3 1
[ ]
⋅ I am,x −1,z − I am,x +1,z + I am,0,z
3
4 I am,x −1,z
b 5 1
[ ]
⋅ I am,x −1,z − I am,x,z + I am,0,z
3
6 I am,0,z
7 1
[ ]
⋅ I am,x +1,z − I am,x,z + I am,0,z
3
8 I am,x +1,z
9 1
[ ]
⋅ I am,x +1,z − I am,x −1,z + I am,0,z
3
10 I am,0,z
11 1
[ ]
⋅ I am,x,z − I am,x −1,z + I am,0,z
3
According to the theory of symmetric components, the zero-sequence current is

calculated as follows:
I am,0,z =
1
[
⋅I +I +I
3 am,A,z am,B,z am,C,z
]
z: winding a or b
Iam: amplitude-matched current
Vector group matching is via a straight-forward input of the vector group identification
number provided that the phase currents of the high and low voltage side(s) are
connected in standard configuration (see Conditioning of the Measured Variables). For
other configurations, special considerations apply (see chapter 7). An anti-clockwise
rotating field needs to be taken into account by making the appropriate setting at the
P630C. The P630C will then automatically form the complementary value of the set
vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 – set ID).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)
3-60 Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering
3-90 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping Characteristics
The differential and restraining current variables for each measurement system are
calculated from the current variables after amplitude and vector group matching. The
formation of the restraining variables differs between two- and three-winding protection.
The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to the
protected equipment, that is the current arrows of all windings point either towards the
protected object or away from it.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
I d ,y = I s,y ,a + I s,a,b
I R,y = 0.5 ⋅ I s,y ,a − I s,a,b
3-61 Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)
The tripping characteristic of the differential protection device P630C has two knees. The
first knee is dependent on the setting of the basic threshold value D I F F : I d i f f > P S x
and is on the load line for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic
is defined by the setting D I F F : I R , m 2 P S x .
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 3-62
shows the tripping characteristic.
Characteristic equation for the range 0 ≤ I R ≤ 0.5 ⋅ I diff > :
Id I >
= diff
I ref I ref
Characteristic equation for the range 0.5 ⋅ I diff > < I R ≤ I R,m 2 :
Id I > I
= (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) ⋅ diff + m1 ⋅ R
I ref I ref I ref
Characteristic equation for the range I R,m 2 < I R :
Id I > I I
= (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) ⋅ diff + (m1 − m2 ) ⋅ R,m 2 + m2 ⋅ R
I ref I ref I ref I ref
Iref: reference current

m1: gradient of characteristic in range 0.5 ⋅ I diff > < I R ≤ I R,m 2
m2: gradient of characteristic in range I R,m 2 < I R
3-92 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
8.00
Id / Iref
Tripping area
6.00
ic
rist
4.00
e f acte
eed
-sid char
7
0.
=
t
sin ren
m2
for lt cur
gle
2.00
Fau
Blocking area
0.3
m1 =
12200e.DS4
IR,m2 / Iref = 4.0
Id> / Iref = 0.2
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00

IR / Iref
I II III
3-62 Tripping characteristic of differential protection
Rapid (high-set) differential

protection function
Above the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > P S x of the differential current, the
P630C will trip without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the overfluxing
restraint. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > >
P S x >, the restraining current and the saturation discriminator are no longer taken into
account either, that is the P630C will trip regardless of the restraining variable and the
saturation discriminator.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)
3-63 Measuring system of the P630C
3-94 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Inrush stabilization
(harmonic restraint)
When an unloaded transformer is connected, the inrush current at unfavorable switching
instants such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the transformer nominal
current several times over. It takes some time for the current to assume its small
stationary value. Since the high inrush current flows on the connected side only, the
tripping characteristic of differential protection may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing
action is taken. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics
having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by
the inrush current.
The P630C filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second
harmonic components I(2*f0) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio
I(2*f0) / I(f0) exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring system,
tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes:
! Across all three measuring systems

! Selectively for one measuring system (see Figure 3-63)
There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)
3-64 Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
3-96 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Saturation discriminator
Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the
bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is particularly
pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard for through-currents
with transformer saturation, the P630C is provided with a saturation discriminator.
After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator monitors
the occurrence of the differential current over time. For internal faults, the differential
current appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining current. In the case of
passing currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not
appear until transformer saturation begins. Accordingly, a locking signal is generated on
the basis of level monitoring of the differential current as compared to the restraining
current, and thus the desired through-stabilization is achieved. Locking is restricted to
the measuring system where an external fault was detected.
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-65 Saturation discriminator
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)
Overfluxing restraint
If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation
effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping.
The fact that the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high
proportion of harmonics having five times the system frequency serves as the basis of
stabilization.
The P630C filters the differential current and determines the fundamental component
I(f0) and the fifth harmonic component I(5*f0). If the ratio I(5*f0) / I(f0) exceeds the set
value D I F F : O v e r I ( 5 f 0 ) / I ( f 0 ) P S x in at least one measuring system, and if the
restraining current is smaller than 4·Iref , then tripping is blocked selectively for one
measuring system.
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.
3-98 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-66 Overfluxing restraint
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured operating data

of differential protection
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data
provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-67 Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents
3-100 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 and DTOC2)
In the P630C, two three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection functions (DTOC1 and
DTOC2) are implemented. For each DTOC function, a read-only parameter is provided
for the assignment to one of the transformer ends. The DTOC function will then monitor
the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current for the
selection. Function group DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of
the DTOC protection functions. Function group DTOC2 is equivalent.
3-68 Selection of measured variables for DTOC protection
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover,
3-69 Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
3-102 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages

The three phase currents are monitored by the P630C with three-stage functions to
detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be
active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic
parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are
active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one
phase, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush
stabilization function of differential protection.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)
3-70 Phase current stages
3-104 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current
stages
The P630C calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents
based on the formulas shown below. The rotary field direction setting is taken into
account.
Clockwise rotating field:

1
( 2
Ineg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3
)
Anticlockwise rotating field:
1
( 2
)
3
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P630C with three-stage functions to

detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be
active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic
parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are
active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one
phase, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
inputs.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)
3-71 Negative-sequence current stages
3-106 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stages

The residual current is monitored with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds
the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic”
thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation
of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started.
Once these stages have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the general
starting decision is set to With starting IN, a trip signal is issued as well.
inputs. Furthermore, the timer stages can – depending on the setting - be blocked
automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)
3-72 Residual current stages
3-108 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a general
starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the residual
current stages should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general
starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
3-73 General starting
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)
Counters of the DTOC

protection function
The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
3-74 Counters of the DTOC protection function
3-110 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 and IDMT2)
In the P630C, two three-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection functions (IDMT1 and
IDMT2) are implemented. For each IDMT function, a read-only parameter is provided for
the assignment to one of the transformer ends. The IDMT function will then monitor the
phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current for the selection.
Function group IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the IDMT
protection functions. Function group IDMT2 is equivalent.
3-75 Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover,
3-76 Enabling or disabling IDMT protection
Time-dependent
characteristics
The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negative-
sequence current and the residual current operate independently and can be set
separately. The user can select from a multitude of characteristics. The tripping
characteristics available for selection are shown in the Figures 3-77 to 3-80.
3-112 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Release
Characteristic Characteristic
k = 0.01 to 10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ b
 I 
  −1
I 
 ref 
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112   R
  tr = k ⋅ 2
 a   I 
t = k ⋅ + c    −1
I 
  I b   ref 
   −1 
 I  
  ref  
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI   R
  tr = k ⋅ 2
 a   I 
t = k ⋅ + c    −1
I 
  I b   ref 
   −1 
 I  
  ref  
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
 I 
 
I 
 ref 
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse  I 
t = k ⋅  5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln 

 I ref 
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K1A S8Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1 k=0.05
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K3A S8Z50K4A
Characteristic No. 3 Characteristic No. 4

3-77 Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3
3-114 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K5C S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K7C
3-78 Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1 k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K8C S8Z50K9C
ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50KAC
3-79 Tripping characteristics per ANSI
3-116 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50KBA S8Z50KCA
3-80 Tripping characteristics RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stage

The three phase currents are monitored by the P630C to detect when they exceed the
set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic”
threshold is active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of
Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running.
The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference
current is exceeded in one phase. The P630C determines the highest of the three phase
currents for further processing. As a function of this current and of the set characteristic,
the P630C will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set;
the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current.
The IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization
function of differential protection.
3-118 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-81 Phase current stage
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current
stage
The P630C calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents
based on the formulas shown below. The rotary field direction setting is taken into
account.
Clockwise rotating field:

1
( 2
3
)
Anticlockwise rotating field:
1
( 2
)
3
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P630C to detect when they exceed
the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic”
thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation
of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started.
Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be
blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush
3-120 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-82 Negative-sequence current stage
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stage

The residual current is monitored by the P630C to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” threshold
is active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic
Parameters”); the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT
protection function issues a starting signal if the residual current exceeds a value of 1.05
times the set reference current. As a function of the set characteristic and of the residual
current, the P630C will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time
can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of
the residual current.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary

signal input. Furthermore, the inverse-time stage can – depending on the setting - be
blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
3-122 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-83 Residual current stage
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)
Holding time
The setting for the holding time defines the period for the IDMT starting time to be stored
after the starting has dropped out. If the starting time returns while the hold time elapses,
the new starting time is added to the stored time. If the sum of the starting times reaches
the tripping time determined by the P630C then the appropriate message is issued. If the
starting time does not return while the hold time elapses then the memory storing the
sum of the starting times will – in accordance with the setting - be cleared either without
delay or according to the set characteristic. The phase current stage serves as an
example to illustrate the effect of the holding time in Figure 3-84.
3-124 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-84 The effect of the holding time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example
Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached.
Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-125

3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
If 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase, a general starting
decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the residual current stage
should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general starting
triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
3-85 General starting
Counters of the IDMT

protection function
The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
3-86 Counters of the IDMT protection function
3-126 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THRM1)
The thermal overload protection is based on a first-order model. A parameter is provided

for the assignment to one of the transformer ends.
3-87 Selection of measured variables for thermal overload protection
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)
thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-88 Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection
3-128 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The maximum phase current IP,max.y of the selected transformer end serves to track a
first-order thermal image according to IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern
the tripping time:
! The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object according to

THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx.
! The set tripping level ∆ϑtrip according to
THRM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx
! The accumulated thermal load ∆ϑ0
! The updated measured coolant temperature Θa des Schutzobjektes according to the
set default
THRM1: Default CTA PSx
! The set maximum permissible coolant temperature Θa,max according to
THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
! The set maximum permissible object temperature Θmax. according to
THRM1: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
The object temperature is calculated from the current IP,max.y and can be displayed at
T H R M 1 : O b j e c t t e m p e r a t . , T H 1 . For the coolant temperature a default temperature
value is used. The difference between the settings for the maximum permissible
temperatures of the protected object and the coolant can be displayed at T H R M 1 : O /T
f.Iref persist 1.
The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
  I 
2 
   − ∆ϑ0 
  IB  
t trip = τ ⋅ ln 2 
 I   Θ a − Θ a,max 
  I  − ∆ϑtrip ⋅ 1 − 

  B   Θ max − Θ a,max  
Figure 3-89 shows the tripping characteristics for ∆ϑ0 = 0 % and with identical settings
for the default of the updated measured coolant temperature and the maximum
permissible coolant temperature.
The setting for the operating mode selects an ‘absolute’ or ‘relative’ replica. If the setting
is for Absolute replica, the P630C will operate with a fixed trip threshold ∆ϑtrip of 100 %.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)
θtrip / %
10000
200
1000
110
τ/min
50
100
200
110
1000
10 50
t/min 200
1
110
50 30
0.1
0.01 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.001
I/Iref
D5Z50BEA
3-89 Tripping characteristic of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ∆ϑ0 = 0 % and identical settings for the default of the
updated measured coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature)
3-130 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Warning
A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the set warning level
T H R M 1 : R e l . O / T w a r n i n g P S x . Moreover, a pre-trip warning time can be
defined. The time difference between the warning time and the trip time is set at
THRM1: Warning pre-trip PSx.
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the
set time constant T H R M 1 : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x . The thermal replica may be
reset either from the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal
input. Resetting is effective even when the thermal overload protection is disabled.
Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)
3-90 Thermal overload protection
3-132 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-91 Thermal replica reset
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 and MCM_2)
In the P630C two measuring-circuit monitoring functions are implemented. For each
MCM function, a read-only parameter is provided for the assignment to one of the
transformer ends monitored by the P630C. Function group MCM_1 will serve as an
example to illustrate the operation of the MCM functions. Function group MCM_2 is
equivalent.
measuring-circuit
monitoring
The measuring-circuit monitoring function can be disabled or enabled from the local
control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
3-92 Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring
3-134 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
The ratio of negative- to positive-sequence current is used as the criterion for measuring-
circuit monitoring. The measuring-circuit monitoring function is triggered if the set ratio
Ineg / Ipos is exceeded and either the negative- or the positive-sequence current exceeds
0.02 Inom. After the set operate delay period has elapsed, a warning signal is issued.
3-93 Measuring-circuit monitoring for end a
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Groups LIM_1 and LIM_2)
In the P630C two limit value monitoring functions are implemented. For each LIMIT
function, a read-only parameter is provided for the assignment to one of the transformer
ends monitored by the P630C. Function group LIM_1 will serve as an example to
illustrate the operation of the MCM functions. Function group LIM_2 is equivalent.
Enabling or disabling limit

value monitoring
The limit value monitoring function can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
Monitoring minimum and

maximum phase currents
The function monitors the minimum and maximum phase currents of a transformer end.
If a maximum phase current exceeds the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase
current falls below the relevant set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has
elapsed.
3-94 Selection of measured variables
3-136 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-95 Limit value monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Parametrierbare Logik (Funktionsgruppe LOGIK)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P630C can be linked by logical ‘OR’ or ‘AND’ operations or by
additional ‘NOT’ operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . a s s i g n m . o u t p . n , where
n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to the

signals generated by the P630C, initial conditions for governing the equations can be set
from the local control panel, the binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces.
Intervention in the logical operations through the binary signal inputs can occur in
different ways. The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an
updating function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are
stored. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs that are configured
for L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input (L O G I C : R e s e t
n E X T ) has also been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the
two functions is configured, then this is interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input
signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a
logic value of ‘1’), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
3-138 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-96 Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The signal L O G IC : T r i g g e r n is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)
3-97 Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
3-140 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another,
higher-order, equation and this makes it possible to have a sequence of interlinked
Boolean equations. The equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order
of each equation so that the end result of a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations is
given by the highest-order equation.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures
3-98 to 3-102 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes.
Note: If the unit is set to “off-line“, the equations are not processed and all outputs are
set to a logic value of '0'.
3-98 Operating mode 1: Operate/release delay
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)
3-99 Operating mode 2: Operate-delay/pulse duration
3-100 Operating mode 3: Operate/release delay, retriggerable
3-142 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-101 Operating mode 4: Operate-delay/pulse duration, retriggerable
3-102 Operating mode 5: Minimum time
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)
3-103 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
3-144 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

4 Design
4 Design
The P630C is mounted in an aluminum case. Connection is via threaded terminal ends.
The case is suitable for either wall-surface mounting or flush panel-mounting. The
mounting brackets adjust for flush mounting.
Figures 4-1 and 4-2 show the case dimensions and mounting dimensions. A cover frame
is supplied for flush mounting (see Installation and Connection).
Regardless of model, the P630C – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 system
– is equipped with the standard local control panel. The local control panel is covered
with a tough film so that the specified degree of protection will be maintained. In addition
to the essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of
17 LED indicators is also incorporated into the local control panel. The meaning of the
various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
!
The components located behind the front panel are energized. Therefore always turn off
the supply voltage before opening the device.
The processor module with the local control module is attached to the reverse side of the
removable front plate and connected to the combined I/O module via a ribbon cable. The
I/O module incorporates the power supply, the optional input transformers, the output
relays and optical couplers for binary input signals.
!
The secondary circuit of operating current transformers must not be opened. If the
secondary circuit of an operating current transformer is opened, there is the danger that
resulting voltages may injure personnel or damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for current transformer connection is not a shorting block.
Therefore always short-circuit the current transformer before loosening the threaded
terminals.
The front panel houses the -X6 serial interface for parameter setting by way of a PC. The
optional communication interfaces (-X7 and -X8 or -X9 and -X10) and the optional
IRIG-B input (-X11) are located on the underside of the case.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 4-1

4 Design
(continued)
4-1 Dimensional drawing of the wall-mounting case (-X7 and -X8 or -X9 and -X10: optional communication interfaces; -X11: optional IRIG-B input;
-X31 and -X32 or -X33: optional guidance interface)
4-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

4 Design
(continued)
4-2 Dimensional drawing of the flush-mounting case (-X7 and -X8 or -X9 and -X10: optional communication interfaces; -X11: optional IRIG-B input;
-X31 and -X32 or -X33: optional guidance interface)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 4-3

4-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
5 Installation and Connection
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P630C units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking units, and do not use
force. In addition, make sure to remove the supporting documents supplied with each
individual unit from the inside carton.
After unpacking each unit, inspect it visually to make sure it is in proper mechanical
condition.
If the P630C needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version
The nominal data and design version of the P630C can be determined by consulting the
type identification label. One type identification label is located next to the upper terminal
blocks. Another copy of the type identification label is affixed to the outside of the P630C
packaging.
The data shown on the type identification label include the nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom (‘UH,nom’) and the nominal input voltage Vin,nom (‘UE,nom’).
The P630C design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of
the order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the supporting documents
supplied with the unit.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-1

(continued)
5.3 Location Requirements
The P630C has been designed to conform to EN 69255-6. Therefore it is important when
choosing the installation location to make sure that it provides the conditions specified in
the chapter entitled 'Technical Data'. Several important conditions are listed below.
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P630C.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage for the
power supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Appropriate measures taken in substations must correspond to the state of the art (see,
for example, the VDEW ring binder entitled "Schutztechnik" [Protective Systems],
Section 8, June 1992 edition, which includes recommended measures for reducing
transient overvoltage in secondary lines in high voltage substations).
5-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P630C is surface-mounted on a panel, the leads to the P630C are
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be in back, an
opening can be provided above and below the surface-mounted case, as shown in
Figure 5-1 for the lower opening. The same applies analogously to the upper opening.
5-1 Opening for running the connecting leads to the surface-mounted case (dimensions in mm)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-3

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed to be flush-mounted in control panels. The

dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P630C is
mounted in a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the
degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). Figure 5-2 shows the required panel
cutout for the flush-mounted case. After the case has been mounted, the cover frame
must be snapped onto the mounting bolts of the flush-mounted case (see Figure 5-3) in
order to maintain the required degree of protection.
5-2 Panel cutout for the flush-mounted case (dimensions in mm)
5-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
5-3 Installation of the flush-mounted case
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-5

(continued)
5.5 Protective Grounding
The unit must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements.
Holes for the grounding connection are located in the two mounting brackets of the
P630C. A ground connection assembly kit is supplied with the unit. The clamp bracket
(see Figure 5-4, “Pos. 3”) is marked with a PCT symbol:
The ground connection must be assembled as shown in Figure 5-4.
The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor must conform to applicable national
standards. A minimum conductor cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required. The grounding
connection must be low-inductance, i.e., as short as possible.
This grounding procedure is also absolutely essential for proper operation of the device
and is thus equivalent to system grounding. Potentials that need to be grounded from an
operational standpoint are already suitably connected to the device ground inside the
unit.
5-4 Mounting the PE terminal
5-6 P630C/EN M/C11 // AFSV.12.09381 EN /// P630C-301-401-601

(continued)
5.6 Connection
The P630C must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in
the Supporting Documents supplied with the unit. The terminal connection diagrams that
apply to the P630C are also found in the appendix to this manual.
Copper leads having a 2.5-mm2 cross-section are generally suitable as the connecting
leads between the current transformers and the P630C. Under certain conditions the
connecting leads between the main current transformers and the P630C must be short
and have a larger cross-section in order to handle the allowable burden on the main
current transformers. Copper leads having a 1.5 mm2 cross section are adequate for
connecting the binary signal inputs, the signaling and triggering circuits, and the power
supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting the Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P630C power supply, make sure that
the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage agrees with the nominal value of the
auxiliary system voltage.
The P630C has an auxiliary voltage supply that can be switched between ranges and is
factory-set for the voltage range of VA,nom = 110 to 250 V DC or 100 to 230 V AC.
Before changing the auxiliary voltage range, turn off any connected auxiliary voltage.
The components located behind the front panel are energized!
The voltage range is switched by repositioning plug-in jumpers on the I / O (input-output)

module. After loosening four bolts on the front side of the front panel the local control
module (front panel and processor module), can be removed once the following
connectors have been unplugged:
! The ribbon cable plug connecting the local control module to the I / O module
! The ribbon cable plug connecting the local control module to the optional serial
communication interfaces (to optical fibers or to wires)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-7

(continued)
In the upper portion of the I / O module, between output relay and current input
transformers, are plug-in jumpers, which are plugged in a position depending on the
desired auxiliary voltage range.
5-5 Switching the auxiliary voltage supply. The factory-set jumper position is shown.
5-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, check to make sure that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the unit agree.
the resulting voltages may injure personnel or damage the insulation.
Therefore always short-circuit current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
Connecting the measuring

circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-6. It is essential that the grounding configuration
shown in the diagram be followed. If a connection is in opposition, this can be taken into
account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
Connecting the binary

inputs and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable.
The terminal connection diagrams give a polarity for connection of the binary signal
inputs. However, this is only a recommendation. Connection can be as desired.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-9

(continued)
B
C
X1 Current-measuring PC interface
inputs X/Y
1 IA T11 X6
2 2
D1[T]
3 IB T12 U16 D2[R]
3
4
5 IC T13 E2[C]
5
6
RS 232
Per order
X1 Current-measuring Comm. interface

inputs Channel 1
T21 optical fiber link
7 IA X7
8 1
U17 X/Y
9 IB T22
10 X8
11 IC T23 U18 X/Y
1
12
OR wire link
a X//Y
X9
1
D2[R] 2
3
U19
X1 Power supply 4
D1[T] 5
b 13 (+) UH
14 (-) RS 485
PE U100 Comm. interface
Channel 2
wire link only
X1 Binary inputs X10
X//Y
1
15
UE D2[R] 2
U1
16 3
U20
17 4
UE U2
18 D1[T] 5
RS 485
X3 Output relays
IRIG-B
35 time synchronization X11
36 K1 1
U21
#
32
#
33
34
29
30 K2 Guidance interface
31
optical fiber link X31
27 1
U22 X/Y
28 K3
22 X32
26 K4 1
U23 X/Y
25 K5
24 K6
23 K7 OR wire link
19 X33
X//Y
20 K8 1
21 D2[R] 2
A B C 3
U24
4
D1[T] 5
P630C RS 485
5-6 Standard schematic diagram for the P630C.
5-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface
An IRIG-B-interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by means of a BNC connector. Coaxial cable having a characteristic
impedance of 50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided in order to operate the unit from a personal computer (PC).
!
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that
is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interfaces
Communication interfaces are provided for permanent connection of the unit to a control
system for substations or to a central substation unit. The unit is connected to
communication channel 1 either by a special connector with optical fibers or an RS 485
interface with twisted copper wires, depending on the type of communication interface.
Connection to channel 2 is always by way of an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the unit is shut off.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-11

(continued)
A communication link consisting of a communication master and several slaves can be

established via the RS 485 interface. The communication master can be a control
station, for example. The devices connected to the communication master, such as the
P630C, are the communication slaves.
The RS 485 interface of the P630C is designed electrically to permit full-duplex operation
through a 4-wire connection. However, communication through the RS 485 interface is
always in the half-duplex mode of operation. The following connection instructions must
always be followed:
Always use twisted-pair shielded cables only, the kind used for telecommunications
systems.
At least one symmetrically twisted core pair will be required.
Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly
in accordance with specifications.
Ground all shields at both ends (large-area grounding).
Ground free (unshielded) cores at one end only.
As another option, a 2-wire or 4-wire connection is also possible. For the 4-wire
connection, a cable with two symmetrically twisted core pairs is required. Figure 5-7
shows the 2-wire connection and Figure 5-8 the 4-wire connection, as illustrated for
channel 2 of the communication module. If channel 1 of the communication module is
designed as an RS 485 interface, then the same arrangement would apply.
2-wire connection:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in all devices that have a full-duplex interface
as part of their electrical system – like the P630C, for example. In the two devices that
form the physical ends of the line, the pair of leads must be terminated by a
200-to-220-Ω resistor. In most Schneider Electric devices, and also in the P630C, a
220-Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface and can be connected by means of
a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire connection:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device that forms one physical end of
the line. The receivers of the slaves that have a full-duplex interface as part of their
electrial system (like the P630C, for example) are connected to the transmitter of the
communication master, and the transmitters of the slaves are connected to the receiver
of the master. Devices that only have a half-duplex interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master. In the last physical participant (master or slave)
of the communication link, the transmitter and receiver must each be terminated by a
200-to-220-Ω resistor. In most Schneider Electric devices, and also in the P630C, a
220-Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface and can be connected by means of
a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. The second resistor must
be connected to the device externally (see Chapter 13 for the resistor Order No.).
5-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11-S

(continued)
P630C
P630C
5-7 2-wire connection
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 5-13

(continued)
P630C
P630C
5-8 4-wire connection
5-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

6 Local Control Panel
Local control panel

All data required for operation of the protection device are entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management are read out there as well. The
following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
! Readout and modification of settings

! Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic state signals
! Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
! Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
! Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and
operating program (S&R-103).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-1

(continued)
6.1 Display and Keypad
Control and display

elements
The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric
characters, eleven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.
TRIP
ALARM
C
OUT OF SERVICE G
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
G
G
G
C CLEAR
READ
ENTER
F1
F2
F3
F4
6-1 View of the local control panel
6-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11-S

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels. At the
Panel level, data such as measured operating data are displayed in Panels that provide
a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the Panel
level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables, etc.)
and to change them, if appropriate. The user can access a selected event recording
(event log) from either the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, by
pressing the READ key .
Measured Value Recordings

Panels
Voltage A-B prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
20.7 kV Operat. data record.
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recording Event recordings
+ C
Global Measured operating data

General functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1 Logic state signals
Parameter subset ...
Menu tree
6-2 Display Panels and menu tree
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-3

(continued)
Display Panels
The P630C can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are called up by the device
according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and
the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the design version of the
given unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation
Panel is always available.
Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. As the user navigates through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LCD
display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user.
The data points are accessed at the lowest level of a menu tree branch. They are
displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically coded form, as selected
by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit
of measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one value element associated with them. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list
data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD display,
indicating that there is another level below the displayed level. The individual value
elements of a list data point are found at the lower level. In the case of a list parameter,
the individual value elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
6-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Keys
! ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys /
Panel Level:
Press the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys to switch between the pages of the Measured Value
Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Parameter values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys in this mode to
change the parameter value.
(‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.)
With list parameters, press the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
! ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys /

Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Parameter values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ keys are pressed, the
cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one
digit to the right or left.
(‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list parameter, press the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
! ENTER Key
Panel Level:
Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
! CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode:
Press the CLEAR key to reject the changes entered and exit the input mode.
! READ Key
Press the READ key to access the set of user-selected functions (see "Configurable
Function Keys" in Chapter 3) from either the Panel level or from any other point in the
menu tree. Repeated pressing of the READ key will then sequentially trigger the
selected functions (such as event recordings or setting parameters) if several
functions have been selected.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-5

(continued)
! Function Keys F1 to Fx
A single function or a menu jump list can be assigned to each function key (see
"Configurable Function Keys" in Chapter 3). Once a menu jump list has been
assigned to a function key, then repeated pressing of the function key will
sequentially trigger the selected functions.
The following tables, which show the individual control steps, specify the displays that
can be changed by pressing specific keys. A small black square to the right of the
ENTER key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. The examples
shown here do not necessarily apply to the device type described in this manual; they
merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.2 Illumination of the Display
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
return time has elapsed (‘return time illumination’ setting in the menu tree at
‘Par/Conf/LOC’). The display illumination is turned on again by pressing one of the
control keys. In this case, the control action that is normally triggered by the key will not
be executed. This response is also exhibited by the function keys. Reactivation of
display illumination is also possible by way of a binary input.
If continuous illumination is desired, the user can set the ‘return time illumination’
function to ‘blocked’.
6.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx
Function key F1 is not enabled unless the associated password F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d

fu n c t. k e y1 has been entered first. Once the password has been entered, the function
key remains active for no longer than the set time F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s .
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same
rules apply to function keys F2 to Fx.
In the following example, the password for the function keys is the factory-set password.
If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the
Password'), the following description will apply analogously.
6-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
0 Display example. Voltage C-A prim.

20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
1 Press function key F1. Eight asterisks (*) F1
appear in the fourth line as a prompt for

entering the password. ********
2a Press the following keys in sequence:

‘Left’
*
‘Right’
‘Up’
‘Down’
The display will change as shown in the
column on the right. *
Now press the ENTER key. Voltage C-A prim.

20.8 kV
If the correct password has been entered, the
Current A prim.
the previous display will re-appear. 415 A
Function keys F1 to Fx are enabled for the set
return time.
If an invalid password has been entered, the
display shown in Step 1 appears.
2b Until the enter key is pressed, the control C Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
action can be aborted at any time by pressing Current A prim.
the CLEAR key. 415 A
3 Press F1 again. The function assigned to

F1
Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
this function key will now be executed. Current A prim.
415 A
4 If you press any further function keys while Fx

Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
the return time is running, the assigned Current A prim.
functions will be executed without a further 415 A
password prompt.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-7

(continued)
6.4 Changing Between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.

Action
Going from the menu tree
level to the Panel level 0 From the menu tree level, the user can go to Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
the Panel level from any position within the No (=off)
menu tree.
1 First press the ‘Up’ key and hold it down + C Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
while pressing the CLEAR key. Current A prim.
415 A
Note:
It is important to press the ‘Up’ key first and
release it last to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
Going from the Panel level to
the menu tree level 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel XX YYY

level to the menu tree level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC'), the display
will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been
configured.
6-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
6.5 Control at the Panel Level
The measured values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’ in the menu tree. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the design version of
the given unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The selected
set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the section entitled
‘Setting a List Parameter’ for instructions regarding selection. If the user has selected
M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n for a Panel, then that Panel will be inactive.
The Measured Value Panels are called up in accordance with system conditions. If, for
example, the unit detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the unit detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset – by pressing the CLEAR key C , for example.

Action
0 Up to six selected measured values can be Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
displayed simultaneously on the Panel. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 If more than two measured values have or

Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
been selected, they can be viewed one page at Current A prim.
a time by pressing the ‘Up’/’Down’ keys. The 415 A
next page of the Measured Value Panel will
also be displayed after the set Panel hold time
has elapsed (setting in menu tree at
‘Par/Conf/LOC’).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-9

(continued)
6.6 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.6.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and function

groups
All data points are grouped according to their function group association and are also
organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
‘Parameters’, ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’, which form the first folder level. Up to two further
folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and
a maximum of three folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
level 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
level 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
level 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-3 Basic menu tree structure
6-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
6.6.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows setting parameters, signals, and
measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the
setting parameters, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text
descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the
menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display
is shown in plain text mode only.

Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Device on-line
text mode to address mode. No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text C +

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key C or 0
and either the ‘Left’ key or the ‘Right’ key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-11

(continued)
6.6.3 Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global change-enabling
function
! To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. change enabl.’
parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the
section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering
the password.
Selective change-enabling
function
! Password input prior to any parameter change.
The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a

specific time interval. The following example is based on the factory-set password. If the
password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled ‘Changing the
Password’), the following description will apply analogously.
6-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’, select Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter. No
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

appear in the fourth line of the display. No
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

‘Left’ No
*
‘Right’ Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
‘Up’ Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
‘Down’ Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The display will change as shown in the No
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates Param. change enabl.
that the setting can now be changed by No
pressing the ‘Up’ or ‘Down’ keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Yes
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for Yes
further parameter changes.
The same procedure applies to any parameter change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
parameter change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-
enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling
function has been activated.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-13

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing
the ‘Up’ key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the ‘Up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all parameters can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu
tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
parameters, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The
following entries in the ”Change” column of the address list (see appendix) indicate
whether values can be changed or not:
! "on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.
! "off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled.
! "-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
6.6.4 Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Action
0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

In this example, the change-enabling function Yes
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
1 Select the desired parameter by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
the keys. 50000 s
2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
3 Press the ‘Left’ or ’Right’ keys to move the Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
cursor to the left or right. 50000 s
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
by pressing the ‘Up’ and ’Down’ keys. In the 50010 s
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
5 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting parameter for a
value change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A further
parameter can be selected for a value change
by pressing the keys.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-15

(continued)
6.6.5 Setting a List Parameter
Using list parameters, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measured values that will
be displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number ’m’ that can be
selected out of the total number ’n’ of the set is given in the address list in the ’Remarks’
column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an ‘OR’ operator. Other operators
(NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for
linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be
processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0
communication protocol, the user defines the class of a parameter instead of assigning
operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an example to
illustrate the setting of a list parameter.

Action
0 Select a list parameter (in this example, the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at
‘Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (") indicates that a list parameter
has been selected.
1 Press the ‘Down’ key. The first function and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

the first selected signal will appear in the third #01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol ‘#01’ Trip zone 1
in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If ‘MAIN: Without function’ appears
for the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has been made yet.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

by pressing the ‘Right’ and ’Left’ keys. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Once the end of the list is reached, the display Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will #02 DIST
light up. Trip zone 2
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

pressing the ‘Right’ and ‘Left’ keys in the input #02 DIST
mode. Trip zone 4
5 Select the operator or the class using the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

‘Up’ and ’Down’ keys. In this particular case, OR #02 DIST
only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There Trip zone 4
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
6-16 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)

Action
6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator C Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
7 Press the ‘Up’ key to exit the list at any point Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
in the list.
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip zone 2
LED indicator will go out.
Deleting a list parameter

If ‘MAIN: Without function’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-17

(continued)
6.6.6 Memory Readout
After a memory is entered, the memory can be read out at the entry point. It is not
necessary to activate the change-enabling function or even to disable the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
! In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

! In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
! Event memories
# In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/FT_RC’: Fault memories 1 to 8
# In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
# In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit. A given unit may contain only
some of them or even none at all, depending on the device type.
6-18 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100
entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.
1 Press the ‘Down’ key to enter the operating Oper/Rec/OP_RC

01.01.97 11:33 ARC
data memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No
2 Press the ‘Left’ key repeatedly to display the Oper/Rec/OP_RC

01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
entries one after the other in chronological Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘Left’
key again will have no effect.
3 Press the ‘Right’ key to display the previous Oper/Rec/OP_RC

01.01.97 11:33 ARC
entry. Enabled USER
No
4 Press the ‘Up’ key at any point within the Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
operating data memory to return to the entry
point.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-19

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
1 Press the ‘Down’ key to enter the monitoring Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param
2 Press the ‘Right’ key repeatedly to display Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
the entries one after the other in chronological Exception oper. syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the ‘Left’ key to display the previous Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
entry. Checksum error param
4 If the ‘Down’ key is held down while a Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum error param
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred First: 13:33:59.744
Active: Yes
Active: The fault is still being detected Reset: No
(Yes) or is no longer detected (No) Number: 5
by the self-monitoring function.
Reset: The fault was no longer detected by
the self-monitoring function and has
been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.
5 Press the ‘Up’ key at any point within the Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
point.
6-20 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the ‘Down’ key to enter the fault Fault recording 1

FT_RC
memory. First, the fault number is shown. In Event
this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the ‘Right’ key repeatedly to see first Fault recording 1

200 ms FT_DA
the measured fault data and then the binary Running time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start
(after the ‘Right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘Right’ key again will
Fault recording 1
have no effect. 241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
3 Press the ‘Left’ key to see the previous Fault recording 1

0 ms FT_RC
measured value or the previous signal. Record. in progress
Start
4 Press the ‘Up’ key at any point within the Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
fault memory to return to the entry point. 01.01.99 10:00:33
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-21

(continued)
6.6.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be
the case after functional testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate
parameter. The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an
example. In this example the global change-enabling function has already been
activated.
6-22 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)

Action
0 Select the reset parameter. Line 3 of the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
display shows the number of faults since the 10
last reset, 10 in this example.
1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
2 Press the ‘Up’ or ‘Down’ keys to change the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
setting to ‘Execute’. 10
Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in 0
line 3 is reset to ‘0’.
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
recordings after leaving the standard control 10
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged. Any
parameter can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-23

(continued)
6.6.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel (such as a manual trip command for testing
purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password. This setup is designed to
prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function
has been activated.
The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a

specific time interval. The following example illustrates the password-protected output of
a manual trip command using the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see the section entitled ‘Changing the Password’), the following
description will apply analogously.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN’, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
select the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. USER’. Don't execute
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) C Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
‘Left’ Don't execute
*
‘Right’ Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
‘Up’ Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
‘Down’ Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd USER
The display will change as shown in the Don't execute
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates Man. trip cmd. USER
that the setting can now be changed by Don't execute
pressing the ‘Up’ or ’Down’ keys.
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
6-24 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)

Action
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The Don't execute
unit will execute the command.
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT C Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.6.9 Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘Left’, ’Right’, ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys may be used to define
the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
1 2
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-25

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
‘Password’ parameter. ********
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the ‘Left’, ’Right’, ‘Up’ and ’Down’ Par/Conf/LOC

Password
keys to enter the valid password. The display ********
will change as shown in the column on the *
right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED Par/Conf/LOC

Password
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The _
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.
4 Enter the new password, which in this Par/Conf/LOC

Password
example is done by pressing the ‘Up’ key *
followed by the ‘Down’ key.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new password again.
6-26 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)

Action
6 Re-enter the password. Par/Conf/LOC

Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again. If the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new password is now valid.
7b If the password has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change in password by pressing the CLEAR
key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at C Par/Conf/LOC

Password
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR ********
key. If this is done, the original password
continues to be valid.
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled ‘Change-
Enabling Function’).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 6-27

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Action
0 Turn off the device.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

beginning of device startup, press the four TEST
directional keys (‘Left’, ‘Right’, ‘Up’ and ‘Down’)
at the same time and hold them down.
2 When this condition is detected during Password

startup, the password is displayed. 1234
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST
6-28 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
7 Settings
The P630C must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by means of
appropriate settings. This section gives instructions for determining the settings, which
are located in the folder entitled ‘Parameters’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which
the settings are listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the
menu tree. The 'Address List' in the Appendix lists all parameters, along with setting
ranges and incrementation or selection tables.
The units are supplied with a factory-set configuration of settings that in most cases
correspond to the default settings given in the Address List. If the factory settings differ
from the default settings, then this is indicated below at the appropriate points.
The default settings given in the Address List are activated after a cold restart. The
P630C is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
7.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P630C. They have no effect on the device functions. These
settings should only be changed if the design version of the P630C is modified.
Device DVICE: Device type 000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software version 002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW date 002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW version communic. 002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language version 002 123
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text vers.data model 002 121
Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the operating program, the
user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and
load them into the device. These customized data models contain an
identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier
is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier ‘0’ (factory-set default).
DVICE: F number 002 124
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: Order No. 000 001
Order number of the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-1

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 000 003
Order extension numbers for the device.

DVICE: Module var. slot 1 086 050
DVICE: Module var. slot 2 086 051
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot. The display
always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 086 193
DVICE: Module vers. slot 2 086 194
Index letter specifying the version of the module inserted in the respective
slot.
DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module A 086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
Item number of module B in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module B 086 192
Index letter specifying the version of module B.
7-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Customer ID data 1 000 040
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
DVICE: Device ID 000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

instructions.
DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1 000 048
DVICE: Device password 2 000 049

instructions.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)
7.2 Configuration Parameters
Local control panel LOC: Language 003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.

LOC: Decimal delimiter 003 021
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.

LOC: Password 003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
LOC: Fct. read key 080 110
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.

Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 030 238
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 030 239
Compilation of functions for the two menu jump lists. One of these menu
jump lists can be assigned to a function key by selecting the en tr y L OC :
Trig. menu jmp x EXT (x: 1 or 2) at F_KEY: Fc t. ass ignm. Fx
(Fx: F1, F2, F3 or F4). Up to 16 functions can be selected as described for
L OC : Fc t. re ad ke y. Repeated pressing (in this case of the assigned
function key rather than the read key) will then sequentially trigger the
selected functions.
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel 053 007 Fig. 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel

referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel 053 005 Fig. 3-4
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003 Fig. 3-3
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

LOC: Hold-time for Panels 031 075 Fig. 3-2
Setting for the time period for which a panel is displayed before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected for display than can be shown on the LCD display.
LOC: Autom. return time 003 014 Fig. 3-2
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
LOC: Return time illumin. 003 023
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
7-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
PC link PC: Name of manufacturer 003 183 Fig. 3-5
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
PC: Bay address 003 068 Fig. 3-5
PC: Device address 003 069 Fig. 3-5
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate 003 081 Fig. 3-5
Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity bit 003 181 Fig. 3-5
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P630C.
PC: Spontan. sig. enable 003 187 Fig. 3-5
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. spontan.sig. 003 189 Fig. 3-5
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 084 Fig. 3-5
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 185 Fig. 3-5
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta I 003 056 Fig. 3-5
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 155 Fig. 3-5
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig. 3-5
All measured data are transmitted again through the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-out 003 188 Fig. 3-5
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)
"Logical" communication COMM1: Function group COMM1 056 026
interface 1 Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
COMM1: General enable USER 003 170
Disabling or enabling "logical" communication interface 1.

COMM1: Basic IEC870-5enable 003 215 Fig. 3-6
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 enable 003 216 Fig. 3-6
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable 003 217 Fig. 3-6
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable 003 220 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 enable 003 231 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.

COMM1: COURIER enable 103 040 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat. protocol 003 167 Fig. 3-6
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant 003 214 Fig. 3-10
The user may select between two variants of the

MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line idle state 003 165 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud rate 003 071 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM1: Parity bit 003 171 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P630C.
7-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Dead time monitoring 003 176 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The P630C monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling 003 202 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet comm. address 003 072 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former designation for 'COMM1: Octet comm. address' was
ILSA: Bay address
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 003 240 Fig. 3-11
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16 bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s is the lower-order octet of
the DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test monitor on 003 166 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
COMM1: Name of manufacturer 003 161 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Setting for the name of the manufacturer (to ensure compatibility).
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Octet address ASDU 003 073 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for 'CO M M 1 : O c t e t a d d r e s s A S D U '
was 'I L S A : D e v i c e a d d r e s s ' .
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable 003 177 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. 003 179 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via "logical"
communication interface 1.
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 074 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 175 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via
the communication interface.
COMM1: Delta I 003 051 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 150 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
7-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9
All measured data are transmitted again through the communication
interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has
not been triggered by the other delta conditions.
COMM1: Contin. general scan 003 077 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P630C transmits
all settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The
time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
COMM1: Comm. address length 003 201 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.

COMM1: Cause transm. length 003 192 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.

COMM1: Address length ASDU 003 193 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. 003 196 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.

COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type 003 195 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
COMM1: Time tag length 003 198 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the time tag length.

COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. 003 190 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion 003 191 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: Initializ. signal 003 199 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

COMM1: Balanced operation 003 226 Fig. 3-8
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
7-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Direction bit 003 227 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set at '1' at
the control center and at '0' at the substation.
COMM1: Time-out interval 003 228 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds 003 210 Fig. 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given the register no. 00301, the second
the register no. 00302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig. 003 211 Fig. 3-10

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register
no. 10302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val. 003 212 Fig. 3-10

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
This means that the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the
second the register no. 30302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param. 003 213 Fig. 3-10

selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second
the register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig. 3-10
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Autom.event confirm. 003 249 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig. 3-11
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig. 3-11
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig. 3-11
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig. 3-11
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
7-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs 003 232 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs 003 233 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp. 003 235 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp 003 236 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3) 003 250 Fig. 3-11
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the
master for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input
reporting deadband'.
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig. 3-11
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

COMM1: Command selection 103 042 Fig. 3-12
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Signal selection 103 043 Fig. 3-12
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Meas. val. selection 103 044 Fig. 3-12
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Parameter selection 103 045 Fig. 3-12
Selection of settings to be altered via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig. 3-12
Cycle for re-transmission of the selected measured values.

interface 2 Canceling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the

COMM2: General enable USER 103 170 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Line idle state 103 165 Fig. 3-14
Setting for the line idle state indication.

COMM2: Baud rate 103 071 Fig. 3-14
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity bit 103 171 Fig. 3-14
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P630C.
COMM2: Dead time monitoring 103 176 Fig. 3-14
The P630C monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
7-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Mon. time polling 103 202 Fig. 3-14
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Octet comm. address 103 072 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Name of manufacturer 103 161 Fig. 3-14
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
COMM2: Octet address ASDU 103 073 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable 103 177 Fig. 3-14
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. 103 179 Fig. 3-14
Selection of the spontaneous signals for transmission via logical

COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 103 074 Fig. 3-14
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. 103 175 Fig. 3-14
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via

the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta I 103 051 Fig. 3-14
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 103 150 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig. 3-14
All measured data are transmitted again through the communication

interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has
not been triggered by the other delta conditions.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)
interface 3 Canceling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
COMM3: General enable USER 120 030

COMM3: Baud rate 120 038
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the guidance
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3: Source address 120 031
Address for send signals.

COMM3: Receiving address 120 032
Address for receive signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 1 121 001
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 1 120 001
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 1 120 002
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 1 to 4 (single-pole transmission).
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 5 to 8 (two-pole transmission).
7-16 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM3: Default value rec. 1 120 060
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.

COMM3: Time-out comm.fault 120 033
This timer triggers the alarm signals CO MM 3 : Com mu nic a ti ons fau l t
and SFM ON : Co mm un ic .fa ul t CO MM 3 and sets the received signals
to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has
elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
COMM3: Time-out link fail. 120 035
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this

timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals CO MM 3 : Co mm . l ink fa i lur e
and SFM ON : Co mm .l ink fai l .COM M3 are raised. These can be
mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that
maintenance attention is required.
COMM3: Limit telegr. errors 120 036
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON:
Lim.exceed.,tel.err.). When this threshold is exceeded, the receive signals
are set to their user-defined default values.
IRIG-B interface IRIGB: Function group IRIGB 056 072
Canceling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the

IRIGB: General enable USER 023 200 Fig. 3-18
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)
Function keys F_KEY: Password funct. key1 003 036
F_KEY: Password funct. key2 030 242
These passwords enable the corresponding function keys. Further

information on changing the passwords is given in Chapter 6.
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1 080 112 Fig. 3-19
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F2 080 113
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a

menu jump list may be selected. The two menu jump lists are composed
via L OC : Fct. m enu j mp l is t x (x: 1 or 2).
F_KEY: Operating mode F1 080 132 Fig. 3-19
F_KEY: Operating mode F2 080 133
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.

F_KEY: Return time fct.keys 003 037
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for
no longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
7-18 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary inputs
The P630C has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about
the configuration options for all binary inputs.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.
INP: Fct. assignm. U 1 178 002
INP: Fct. assignm. U 2 178 006
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.

INP: Oper. mode U 1 178 003
INP: Oper. mode U 2 178 007
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P630C has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection
diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration
options for all binary outputs.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned to several output
relays simultaneously for the purpose of contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For
output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be canceled.
Note: For relays with make contacts, the energize-on-signal (ES) mode
corresponds to normally-open operation. The normally-energized (NE) mode
means that the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0"
maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover contacts,
these more common descriptions are not applicable.
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1 157 002
Assignment of functions to output relays.

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1 157 003
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-20 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P630C has a total of 17 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. The
Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all
LED indicators. The following table provides an overview.
LED indicator Description on Configuration

the label strip
as supplied
H1 ‘HEALTHY’ Not configurable. H 1 signals the operational readiness of the device

(supply voltage present).
H 17 ‘EDIT MODE’ Not configurable. H 17 signals the fact that the user is in the ‘EDIT
MODE’. In this mode, parameter values can be changed. (See the
section entitled ‘Display and Keypad’ in Chapter 6.)
H2 ‘OUT OF SERVICE’ Permanently assigned to the function M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty.
H3 ‘ALARM’ Permanently assigned to the function SF MON : Wa rn ing ( L ED) .
H4 ‘TRIP’ The factory-set configuration is shown in the Terminal Connection

Diagrams. These diagrams are found in the appendix to this manual or
in the Supporting Documents shipped with the device.
H 5 to H 16 ---- The user has the option of assigning functions to these LED indicators.
The arrangement of the LED indicators on the local control panel is illustrated in the
dimensional drawings of Chapter 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode or
normally-energized (NE) mode and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED
indicators operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be canceled.
Note: For relays with make contacts, the energize-on-signal (ES) mode
corresponds to normally-open operation. The normally-energized (NE) mode
means that the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0"
maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover contacts,
these more common descriptions are not applicable.
LED: Fct. assignm. H 2 085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2 (‘OUT OF SERVICE’).

The M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y function is permanently assigned to this
LED.
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3 (‘ALARM’).

The S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned to
this LED.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

LED: Operating mode H 2 085 002
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
Main function MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 003 169
Assignment of "logical" communication interfaces to physical

communication channels.
Fault recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
7-22 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
Canceling protection
functions
By means of a configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device functions flexibly
to the scope of protection functions required in each particular h.v. system.
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be canceled:
! The protection function in question must be disabled.

! None of the functions of the protection function being canceled may be assigned to a
binary input.
! None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or to
an LED indicator.
! None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals by way of
an ‘m out of n’ parameter.
The protection function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value belongs is

defined by the function group designation (example: ‘LOGIC’).
Differential protection DIFF: Function group DIFF 056 027
Canceling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: Function group DTOC1 056 031
protection DTOC2: Function group DTOC2 056 032
Canceling function groups DTOC1 and DTOC2 or including them in the

configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: Function group IDMT1 056 051
protection IDMT2: Function group IDMT2 056 061
Canceling function groups IDMT1 and IDMT2 or including them in the

Thermal overload THRM1: Function group THRM1 056 054
protection Canceling function group THR_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

Measuring-circuit MCM_1: Function group MCM_1 056 073
monitoring MCM_2: Function group MCM_2 056 074
Canceling function groups MCM_1 and MCM_2 or including them in the

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)
Limit value monitoring LIM_1: Function group LIM_1 056 042
LIM_2: Function group LIM_2 056 043
Canceling function groups LIM_1 and LIM_2 or including them in the

Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC 056 017
Canceling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the

7-24 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
7.3 Function Parameters
7.3.1 Global
PC-Kopplung PC: Command blocking 003 182 Fig. 3-5
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC

interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block. 003 086 Fig. 3-5
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
"Logical" communication COMM1: Command block. USER 003 172 Fig. 3-6
interface 1 When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER 003 076 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
measured data are transmitted through communication interface 1.
"Logical" communication COMM2: Command block. USER 103 172 Fig. 3-14
interface 2 When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER 103 076 Fig. 3-14

measured data are transmitted through communication interface 2.
Binary outputs OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Fig. 3-21
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main functions MAIN: Protection enabled 003 030 Fig. 3-30
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked ‘off’ in the

Address List can only be changed when the device is off-line.
MAIN: Test mode USER 003 012 Fig. 3-40
When the test mode is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled ‘test mode’.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom 010 030
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.

MAIN: Rotary field 010 049
Setting for the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anti-clockwise.

MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a 019 020 Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b 019 021 Fig. 3-57
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer
(phase currents) of end a or b.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Inom device, end a 010 024 Fig. 3-24
MAIN: Inom device, end b 010 025 Fig. 3-24
Setting for the nominal current of the device for the measurement of the
phase currents of ends a or b.
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,a 010 140
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,b 010 150
Instead of accounting for connection reversal applied to one end in the

settings for D IF F : Vec to r grp . ends z1-z 2 (where z1-z2 stands for
a-b), it is possible to account for it in the settings for connection of the
measuring circuits. The connection of the phase current circuits, ends a to
d, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the connection scheme
shown in Chapter 5, else as Opposite.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP 011 030 Fig. 3-25
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the phase currents to be displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN 011 031 Fig. 3-27
measured operating value of the residual current to be displayed.
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del 010 113 Fig. 3-25
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1 021 021 Fig. 3-32
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1

(M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 2 (M AIN :

B l o c k in g 2 E X T ) is activated.

B l oc k ing 3 E X T ) is activated.

Block ing 4 EXT ) is activated.
7-26 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Fig. 3-36
Blocking of the trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 021 001 Fig. 3-36
Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 1.




MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 021 003 Fig. 3-36
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.




MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1 021 023 Fig. 3-36
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.




MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Fig. 3-33
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’

indication. Signals that lead to blocking of the device are not configurable
and always result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’ indication.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via USER 003 100 Fig. 3-41
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local

control panel rather than via the binary signal inputs, choose the ‘Yes’
setting.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER 003 060 Fig. 3-41
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.

PSS: Keep time 003 063 Fig. 3-41
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.
Self-monitoring SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Fig. 3-42
This setting defines the monitoring signals that will be entered in the
monitoring signal memory. Signals resulting from internal device faults are
not configurable and always result in a warning.
Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger 003 085 Fig. 3-53
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
FT_RC: Id> 016 018 Fig. 3-53
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger fault recording.
FT_RC: IR> 016 019 Fig. 3-53
This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will
trigger fault recording.
FT_RC: Pre-fault time 003 078 Fig. 3-55
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Post-fault time 003 079 Fig. 3-55
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Max. recording time 003 075 Fig. 3-55
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
7-28 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
7.3.2 General Functions
Main functions MAIN: Vnom prim., end a 019 017 Fig. 3-57
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end a of the transformer.

MAIN: Vnom prim., end b 019 018 Fig. 3-57
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end b of the transformer.

MAIN: Hold time dyn.param. 018 009 Fig. 3-31
Setting for the hold time of the “dynamic parameters”. During this period, the
„dynamic“ thresholds are active in place of the “normal“ thresholds.
Differential protection DIFF: General enable USER 019 080 Fig. 3-56
Disabling and enabling the differential protection function.

DIFF: Reference power Sref 019 016 Fig. 3-57
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power.
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,a 019 023 Fig. 3-57
Display of the reference current calculated by the P630C for end a.

DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,b 019 024 Fig. 3-57
Display of the reference current calculated by the P630C for end b.

DIFF: Matching fact. kam,a 004 105 Fig. 3-57
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P630C for end a.

DIFF: Matching fact. kam,b 004 106 Fig. 3-57
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P630C for end b.

DIFF: Vector grp. ends a-b 019 010 Fig. 3-60
For standard connection of the P630C (see Chapter 5), the vector group ID
needs to be entered. For connection reversal applied to one individual end,
this can be taken into account in setting. The following algorithms apply:
Setting = ID + 6
If the addition results in a value > 12 then:
Setting = (ID + 6) – 12
If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged and if
this is not accounted for by the settings at M AIN : C on n .m eas ,c irc .
IP,z (where z is end a or b) a nd M AIN : Co nn .me as ,ci rc. IY,z
(where z is end a,b or c) then the algorithm is:
Setting = 12 – ID
If an anti-clockwise rotating field is present then this should be entered as a
setting at the P630C. In this case, the P630C will automatically form the
complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector
group ID = 12 – set ID).
For application of the P630C as machine protection, the setting must be 0
or 6 depending on the current transformer connection.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)
DIFF: Meas. value rel. Id 011 037 Fig. 3-67
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order
for the P630C to display the differential currents as measured operating
data.
DIFF: Meas. value rel. IR 011 038 Fig. 3-67
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order
for the P630C to display the restraining currents as measured operating
data.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: General enable USER 031 135 Fig. 3-69
protection DTOC2: General enable USER 031 136
Disabling and enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.

DTOC1: Select. meas. input 019 103 Fig. 3-68
DTOC2: Select. meas. input 019 104
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables

monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: General enable USER 031 141 Fig. 3-76
protection IDMT2: General enable USER 031 142
Disabling and enabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

AMZ_1: Auswahl Meßeingang 019 106 Fig. 3-75
AMZ_2: Auswahl Meßeingang 019 116

monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Thermal overload THRM1: General enable USER 031 144 Fig. 3-88
protection Disabling and enabling the thermal overload protection function.
THRM1: Select. meas. input 019 109 Fig. 3-87

relevant for thermal overload protection.
THRM1: Operating mode 039 121 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection. Select

between Absolute replica and Relative replica.
THRM1: O/T f.Iref persist 1 004 152
Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible
temperatures of the protected object and the coolant.
Measuring-circuit MCM_1: General enable USER 031 146 Fig. 3-92

monitoring MCM_2: General enable USER 031 147
Disabling and enabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.

MCM_1: Select. meas. input 031 150
MCM_2: Select. meas. input 031 151

monitored by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
7-30 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
Limit value monitoring LIM_1: General enable USER 014 014 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: General enable USER 014 015
Disabling and enabling the limit value monitoring function.

LIM_1: Select. meas. input 019 111 Fig. 3-94
LIM_2: Select. meas. input 019 112

monitored by limit value monitoring function.
LIM_1: I> 015 116 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: I> 016 116
Setting for the operate value of I>.

LIM_1: I>> 015 117 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: I>> 016 117
Setting for the operate value of I>>.

LIM_1: tI> 015 120 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: tI> 016 120
Setting for the operate delay of I>.

LIM_1: tI>> 015 121 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: tI>> 016 121
Setting for the operate delay of I>>.

LIM_1: I< 015 118 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: I< 016 118
Setting for the operate value of I<.

LIM_1: I<< 015 119 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: I<< 016 119
Setting for the operate value of I<<.

LIM_1: tI< 015 122 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: tI< 016 122
Setting for the operate delay of I<.

LIM_1: tI<< 015 123 Fig. 3-95
LIM_2: tI<< 016 123
Setting for the operate delay of I<<.
Logic LOGIC: General enable USER 031 099 Fig. 3-97
Disabling or enabling the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig. 3-96
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 030 000 Fig. 3-97

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 030 004
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10 030 036
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
7-32 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 030 001 Fig. 3-97

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 030 005
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 030 002 Fig. 3-97

LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 030 006
Settings for timer stage t1 of the respective outputs.
7-34 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 030 003 Fig. 3-97

Settings for timer stage t2 of the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 044 000 Fig. 3-103

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 044 002
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-36 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig. 3-103

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) 044 003
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) 044 019
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)
7.3.3 Parameter Subsets
Differential protection DIFF: Enable PSx 072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152 Fig. 3-56
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for differential

protection.
DIFF: Idiff> PSx 072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142 Fig. 3-63
Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the

reference current of the relevant transformer end.
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx 072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143 Fig. 3-63
Threshold value of the differential current for deactivation of the inrush

stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint.
Note: If the threshold is set too high, it is possible for the P630C not to
trip in the presence of internal faults with transformer saturation.
DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx 072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144 Fig. 3-63
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the differential

protection function independent of restraining variable, harmonic restraint,
overfluxing restraint and saturation detector.
Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P630C can trip in the presence
of external faults with transformer saturation.
DIFF: m1 PSx 072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145 Fig. 3-63
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range

0.5 ⋅ Idiff >< IR ≤ IR,m2 .
DIFF: m2 PSx 072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146 Fig. 3-63
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range

IR > IR,m2
.
DIFF: IR,m2 PSx 072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147 Fig. 3-63
This setting defines the second knee of the tripping characteristic. Above
this knee, the gradient is m2.
DIFF: Op.mode harm.bl. PSx 072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148 Fig. 3-63
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic
blocking or harmonic restraint).
For application of the P630C as machine protection, the harmonic restraint
can be deactivated by way of this setting.
For application of the P630C as transformer protection, the user can select
whether the harmonic restraint should operate in cross-blocking mode or
selectively for one measuring system.
DIFF: RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx 072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159 Fig. 3-64
Operate value of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of

differential protection, as ratio of the second harmonic component to the
fundamental wave for the differential current, in percent.
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx 072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155 Fig. 3-60
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding a.

DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx 072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156 Fig. 3-60
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding b.
7-38 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
DIFF: Overflux.bl. en. PSx 072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158 Fig. 3-66
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint.

DIFF: OverI(5f0)/(f0) PSx 072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160 Fig. 3-66
Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of

the fifth harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential
current, in percent.
DIFF: Op.del.,trip sig.PSx 010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165
Setting for the delay time of the trip command of differential protection.
DIFF: Hyst. effective PSx 072 006 073 006 074 006 075 006
Enabling or disabling the hysteresis of the tripping characteristic at the rate

of 10 %.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: Enable PSx 076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050 Fig. 3-69
protection DTOC2: Enable PSx 076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time

overcurrent protection.
DTOC1: Block tim.st. IN PSx 076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: Block tim.st. IN PSx 076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take
place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
DTOC1: Gen.starting modePSx 076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066 Fig. 3-73
DTOC2: Gen.starting modePSx 076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will
involved in the formation of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
DTOC1: tGS PSx 076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065 Fig. 3-73
DTOC2: tGS PSx 076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC
protection.
DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx 076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
DTOC2: Rush restr.enabl PSx 076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083
Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of

differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent
protection function.
DTOC1: I> PSx 076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: I> PSx 076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071
Setting for the operate value I>.

DTOC1: I>> PSx 076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: I>> PSx 076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072
Setting for the operate value I>>.

DTOC1: I>>> PSx 076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: I>>> PSx 076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163
Setting for the operate value I>>>.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: I> dynamic PSx 076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: I> dynamic PSx 076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161
Setting for the operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
DTOC1: I>> dynamic PSx 076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: I>> dynamic PSx 076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162
Setting for the operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is
only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
DTOC1: I>>> dynamic PSx 076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: I>>> dynamic PSx 076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173
Setting for the operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is
DTOC1: tI> PSx 076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: tI> PSx 076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077
Setting for the operate delay of the I> stage.

DTOC1: tI>> PSx 076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: tI>> PSx 076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078
Setting for the operate delay of the I>> stage.

DTOC1: tI>>> PSx 076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059 Fig. 3-70
DTOC2: tI>>> PSx 076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169
Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage.

DTOC1: Ineg> PSx 076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: Ineg> PSx 076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage.

DTOC1: Ineg>> PSx 076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: Ineg>> PSx 076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage.

DTOC1: Ineg>>> PSx 076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: Ineg>>> PSx 076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage.

DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage in dynamic mode. This
operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage in dynamic mode. This
elapsing.
DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage in dynamic mode. This
elapsing.
7-40 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC1: tIneg> PSx 076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: tIneg> PSx 076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage.

DTOC1: tIneg>> PSx 076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: tIneg>> PSx 076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>> stage.

DTOC1: tIneg>>> PSx 076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205 Fig. 3-71
DTOC2: tIneg>>> PSx 076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>>> stage.

DTOC1: IN> PSx 076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: IN> PSx 076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164
Setting for the operate value IN>.

DTOC1: IN>> PSx 076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: IN>> PSx 076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165
Setting for the operate value IN>>.

DTOC1: IN>>> PSx 076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: IN>>> PSx 076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166
Setting for the operate value IN>>>.

DTOC1: IN> dynamic PSx 076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: IN> dynamic PSx 076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174
Setting for the operate value IN> in dynamic mode. This operate value is
DTOC1: IN>> dynamic PSx 076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: IN>> dynamic PSx 076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175
Setting for the operate value IN>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is
DTOC1: IN>>> dynamic PSx 076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: IN>>> dynamic PSx 076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176
Setting for the operate value IN>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is
DTOC1: tIN> PSx 076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: tIN> PSx 076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170
Setting for the operate delay of the IN> stage.

DTOC1: tIN>> PSx 076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: tIN>> PSx 076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> stage.

DTOC1: tIN>>> PSx 076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062 Fig. 3-72
DTOC2: tIN>>> PSx 076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> stage.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: Enable PSx 081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050 Fig. 3-76
protection IDMT2: Enable PSx 081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for inverse-time

overcurrent protection.
IDMT1: Block tim.st. IN PSx 081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Block tim.st. IN PSx 081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take
place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
IDMT1: Gen.starting modePSx 081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059 Fig. 3-85
IDMT2: Gen.starting modePSx 081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result
in the formation of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
IDMT1: tGS PSx 081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058 Fig. 3-85
IDMT2: tGS PSx 081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT
protection.
IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl PSx 081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060 Fig. 3-81,
3-83
IDMT2: Rush restr.enabl PSx 081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180
Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be

able to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
IDMT1: Iref,P PSx 081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Iref,P PSx 081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).

IDMT1: Iref,P dynamic PSx 081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Iref,P dynamic PSx 081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172
Setting for the reference current (phase current system) in dynamic mode.
This threshold value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic
parameters is elapsing.
IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx 081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx 081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT1: Factor kt,P PSx 081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Factor kt,P PSx 081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174
Setting for factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
IDMT1: Min. trip t. P PSx 081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Min. trip t. P PSx 081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system).

IDMT1: Hold time P PSx 081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Hold time P PSx 081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has
dropped out (phase current system).
IDMT1: Release P PSx 081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056 Fig. 3-81
IDMT2: Release P PSx 081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176
Setting for the release characteristic (phase current system).
7-42 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT1: Iref,neg PSx 081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Iref,neg PSx 081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing..
IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx 081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Character. neg. PSx 081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx 081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Factor kt,neg PSx 081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124
Setting for factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx 081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Min. trip t. neg PSx 081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current

system).
IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx 081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Hold time neg PSx 081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125
dropped out characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT1: Release neg PSx 081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116 Fig. 3-82
IDMT2: Release neg PSx 081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126
Setting for the release characteristic((negative-sequence current system).

IDMT1: Iref,N PSx 081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Iref,N PSx 081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).

IDMT1: Iref,N dynamic PSx 081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Iref,N dynamic PSx 081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182
Setting for the reference current (residual current system) in dynamic mode.
This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic
parameters is elapsing.
IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx 081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx 081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT1: Factor kt,N PSx 081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Factor kt,N PSx 081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184
Setting for factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT1: Min. trip t. N PSx 081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Min. trip t. N PSx 081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187
Setting for the minimum trip time (residual current system).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT1: Hold time N PSx 081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Hold time N PSx 081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185
dropped out (residual current system).
IDMT1: Release N PSx 081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066 Fig. 3-83
IDMT2: Release N PSx 081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186
Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system).
Thermal overload THRM1: Enable PSx 081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070 Fig. 3-88
protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload
protection is enabled.
THRM1: Iref PSx 081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the reference current.

THRM1: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx 081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075 Fig. 3-90
Einstellung des Startfaktors zum Triggern einer Überlastaufzeichnung.

THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
THRM1: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note:
This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other
cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THRM1: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx 081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx 081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

THRM1: Default CTA PSx 081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time
if coolant temperature is not measured.
THRM1: Rel. O/T warning PSx 081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.

THRM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx 081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.

Note:
If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here will
be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
THRM1: Hysteresis trip PSx 081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.

THRM1: Warning pre-trip PSx 081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085 Fig. 3-90
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the warning time and the trip time is set here.
7-44 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

7 Settings
(continued)
Measuring-circuit MCM_1: Enable PSx 081 038 082 038 083 038 084 038 Fig. 3-92
monitoring MCM_2: Enable PSx 081 039 082 039 083 039 084 039
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for measuring-

circuit monitoring.
MCM_1: Ineg/Ipos> PSx 081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042 Fig. 3-93
MCM_2: Ineg/Ipos> PSx 081 043 082 043 083 043 084 043
Setting for the operate value.

MCM_1: Operate delay PSx 081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046 Fig. 3-93
MCM_2: Operate delay PSx 081 047 082 047 083 047 084 047
Setting for the operate delay.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7-45

7-46 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
8 Information and Control Functions
The P630C generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are maintained for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel. All this
information can be found in the ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’ folders in the menu tree.
8.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1 Measured Operating Data
"Logical" communication COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u. 120 040
interface 3 Display of the updated measured operating value for the proportion of
corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored 120 041
Display of the updated measured operating value for the proportion of

corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop back result 120 057
COMM3: Loop back receive 120 056
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-1

(continued)
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig. 3-38
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time of day 003 091 Fig. 3-38
Display of the time of day.

Note: The time can also be set here.
MAIN: Time switching 003 095 Fig. 3-38
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram
from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not have a mutual effect on
one another.
8-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a prim. 005 101 Fig. 3-25
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end a.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay a 005 162 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed maximum current of end a as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.stored a 005 161 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b prim. 005 102 Fig. 3-25
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end b.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay b 006 162 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed maximum current of end b as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.stored b 006 161 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end b as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Current Imin,a prim. 005 104 Fig. 3-25
Display of the minimum phase current of end a as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current Imin,b prim. 005 105 Fig. 3-25
Display of the minimum phase current of end b as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IA,a prim. 005 021 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity, end a.

MAIN: Current IB,a prim. 006 021 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end a.

MAIN: Current IC,a prim. 007 021 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end a.

MAIN: Current IA,b prim. 005 022 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity, end b.

MAIN: Current IB,b prim. 006 022 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end b.

MAIN: Current IC,b prim. 007 022 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end b.

MAIN: Current IN,a prim. 005 121 Fig. 3-27
Display of the residual current calculated by the P630C from the sum of the
phase currents, end a, as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Current IN,b prim. 005 122 Fig. 3-27
phase currents, end b, as a primary quantity.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-3

(continued)
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a p.u. 005 111 Fig. 3-25
Display of the maximum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay a 005 163 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored a 005 160 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end a, as referred to

Inom.
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b p.u. 005 112 Fig. 3-25
Display of the maximum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay b 006 163 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored b 006 160 Fig. 3-25
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end b, as referred to

Inom.
MAIN: Current Imin,a p.u. 005 107 Fig. 3-25
Display of the minimum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Imin,b p.u. 005 108 Fig. 3-25
Display of the minimum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IA,a p.u. 005 031 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current A, end a, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IB,a p.u. 006 031 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current B, end a, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. 007 031 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current C, end a, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. 005 032 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current A, end b, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IB,b p.u. 006 032 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current B, end b, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. 007 032 Fig. 3-25
Display of phase current C, end b, as referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IN,a p.u. 005 141 Fig. 3-27
phase currents, end a, as referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current IN,b p.u. 005 142 Fig. 3-27
phase currents, end b, as referred to Inom.
8-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a 005 089 Fig. 3-28
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end a.

MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a 006 089 Fig. 3-28
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end a.

MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a 007 089 Fig. 3-28
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end a.

MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b 005 092 Fig. 3-28
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end b.

MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b 006 092 Fig. 3-28
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end b.

MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b 007 092 Fig. 3-28
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end b.

MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-b 005 090 Fig. 3-29
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase A.

MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-b 006 090 Fig. 3-29
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase B.

MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-b 007 090 Fig. 3-29
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase C.
Differential protection DIFF: Diff. current 1 005 080 Fig. 3-67
Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, as referred to Iref.

DIFF: Restrain. current 1 005 081 Fig. 3-67
Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, as referred to Iref.

DIFF: Diff. current 2 006 080 Fig. 3-67


DIFF: Diff. current 3 007 080 Fig. 3-67

Thermal overload THRM1: Status replica, TH1 004 150 Fig. 3-90
protection 1 Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function
THRM1.
THRM1: Object temperat.,TH1 004 151 Fig. 3-90
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function

THRM1.
THRM1: Pre-trip t. left,TH1 004 153 Fig. 3-90
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function THRM1 will reach the tripping threshold.
THERM: Stat. repl., p.u.TH1 004 204 Fig. 3-90
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

THRM1 referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object temp. p.u. 1 004 205 Fig. 3-90
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-5

(continued)
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 °C.

THRM1: Temp. offset repl. 1 004 170 Fig. 3-90
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
8-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
8.1.2 Physical State Signals
"Logical" communication COMM3: State receive 1 120 000
interface 3 COMM3: State receive 2 120 003
COMM3: State receive 3 120 006
Display of the relevant receive signal.

COMM3: State send 1 121 000
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
Function keys F_KEY: State F1 080 122 Fig. 3-19

F_KEY: State F2 080 123
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
! Without function No functions are assigned to the function key.
! "Off“: The function key is in the "Off" position.
! "On“: The function key is in the "On" position.
Binary inputs INP: State U 1 178 001
INP: State U 2 178 005
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

" Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
" Low: Not energized.
" High: Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-7

(continued)
Binary and analog outputs OUTP: State K 1 157 001
OUTP: State K 2 157 005
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
" Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
" Low: The output relay is not energized.
" High: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.
LED indicators LED: State H 2 085 000
LED: State H 3 085 003
LED: State H 10 085 024
LED: State H 11 085 027
LED: State H 12 085 030
LED: State H 13 085 033
LED: State H 14 085 036
LED: State H 15 085 039
LED: State H 16 085 042
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
" Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
" Active: The LED indicator is energized.
8-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
8.1.3 Logic state signals
Local control panel LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT 030 230
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT 030 231
LOC: Illumination on EXT 037 101
"Logical" communication COMM1: Command block. EXT 003 173 Fig. 3-6
interface 1 COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT 037 074 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
COMM1: Command blocking 003 174 Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. 037 075 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 003 219
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 003 218
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS 003 221
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223
COMM1: DNP3 003 230
COMM1: COURIER 103 041
"Logical" communication COMM3: Communications fault 120 043 Fig. 3-17

interface 3 COMM3: Comm. link failure 120 044 Fig. 3-17
COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 120 045
IRIG-B interface IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig. 3-18

IRIGB: Synchron. ready 023 202 Fig. 3-18
Binary and analog outputs OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT 040 014 Fig. 3-21
OUTP: Reset latch. EXT 040 015 Fig. 3-21
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked 021 015 Fig. 3-21
OUTP: Latching reset 040 088 Fig. 3-21
Main functions MAIN: Enable protect. EXT 003 027 Fig. 3-30
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT 003 026 Fig. 3-30
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig. 3-32
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT 040 138 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT 036 045 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061
MAIN: Switch dyn.param.EXT 036 033 Fig. 3-31

MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT 037 018 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: Test mode EXT 037 070 Fig. 3-40
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig. 3-39
MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT 060 060 Fig. 3-38
MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled 003 028 Fig. 3-30
MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled 038 046 Fig. 3-30
MAIN: Protect. not ready 004 060 Fig. 3-33
MAIN: Test mode 037 071 Fig. 3-40
MAIN: Blocked/faulty 004 065 Fig. 3-33
MAIN: Meas. circ.I faulty 036 155
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked 021 013 Fig. 3-36

MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset 040 139 Fig. 3-36
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-9

(continued)
MAIN: Manual trip signal 034 017 Fig. 3-36

MAIN: Gen. trip signal 036 251 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 036 005 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 036 071 Fig. 3-36
MAIN: General starting 036 000 Fig. 3-34
MAIN: Dynam. param. active 040 090 Fig. 3-31
MAIN: Without function 060 000
MAIN: Without function 061 000
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via user EXT 036 101 Fig. 3-41
PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT 065 002 Fig. 3-41
PSS: Control via user 036 102 Fig. 3-41
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset 003 061 Fig. 3-41
PSS: PS 1 activated ext. 036 094 Fig. 3-41
PSS: Actual param. subset 003 062 Fig. 3-41
PSS: PS 1 active 036 090 Fig. 3-41
Self-monitoring SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070 Fig. 3-42

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100 Fig. 3-42
SFMON: Warm restart exec. 041 202
SFMON: Cold restart exec. 041 201
SFMON: Cold restart 093 024
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure 090 019
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
SFMON: +15V supply faulty 093 081
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
SFMON: Power supply faulty 093 083
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 096 100
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 097 000
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty 093 070
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty 093 071
8-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
SFMON: Error K 1 097 038
SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
SFMON: Data acquis. failure 090 021
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig. 3-44

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
SELBÜ: Time-out module L 093 130
SELBÜ: Invalid SW vers. L 093 131
SFMON: IRIGBsynchron. error 093 117
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 091 018
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a 091 026 Fig. 3-93

SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b 091 027
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141
SFMONÜ: Iref, a inval. range 091 007
SFMON: Iref, b inval. range 091 008
SFMON: Matching fail. end a 091 000
SFMON: Matching fail. end b 091 001
SFMON: Ratio mtch.fact.inv. 091 004
SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv. 091 006
SFMON: CTA error THRM1 098 036
SFMON: Setting error THRM1 098 038 Fig. 3-90

SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync 093 120
Overload recording OL_RC: Record. in progress 035 003 Fig. 3-47

OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow 035 007 Fig. 3-48
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig. 3-53

FT_RC: Trigger 037 076 Fig. 3-53
FT_RC: Id> triggered 035 018 Fig. 3-53
FT_RC: IR> triggered 035 019 Fig. 3-53
FT_RC: Record. in progress 035 000 Fig. 3-53
FT_RC: System disturb. runn 035 004 Fig. 3-53
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow 035 001 Fig. 3-54
FT_RC: Faulty time tag 035 002
Differential protection DIFF: Enabled 041 210 Fig. 3-56
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-11

(continued)
DIFF: Starting 041 106
DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg. 041 124 Fig. 3-63

DIFF: Id>> triggered 041 221
DIFF: Id>>> triggered 041 222
DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg. 041 118 Fig. 3-64

DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 trigg. 041 121 Fig. 3-66
DIFF: Sat.discr. 1 trigg. 041 115 Fig. 3-65
DIFF: Trip signal 041 075 Fig. 3-63
DIFF: Trip signal 1 041 002 Fig. 3-63
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT 035 120 Fig. 3-70
protection 1 DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT 035 121 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT 035 122 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Block. tIneg> EXT 036 141 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> EXT 036 142 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> EXT 036 143 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT 035 123 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT 035 124 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT 035 125 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Enabled 035 102 Fig. 3-69
DTOC1: General starting 035 128 Fig. 3-73
DTOC1: tGS elapsed 035 129 Fig. 3-73
DTOC1: Starting A 035 104 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Starting B 035 105 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Starting C 035 106 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Starting N 035 107 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Starting I> 035 108 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Starting I>> 035 109 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Starting I>>> 035 110 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Trip signal tI> 035 114 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>> 035 115 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>> 035 116 Fig. 3-70
DTOC1: Starting Ineg 036 144 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Starting Ineg> 036 145 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>> 036 146 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>> 036 147 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: tIneg> elapsed 036 148 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: tIneg>> elapsed 036 149 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: tIneg>>> elapsed 036 150 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg> 036 151 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>> 036 152 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>> 036 153 Fig. 3-71
DTOC1: Starting IN> 035 111 Fig. 3-72
8-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
DTOC1: Starting IN>> 035 112 Fig. 3-72

DTOC1: Starting IN>>> 035 113 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: tIN> elapsed 035 117 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: tIN>> elapsed 035 118 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: tIN>>> elapsed 035 119 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN> 035 126 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>> 035 130 Fig. 3-72
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>> 035 131 Fig. 3-72
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC2: Block. tI> EXT 035 150
protection 2 DTOC2: Block. tI>> EXT 035 151
DTOC2: Block. tI>>> EXT 035 229
DTOC2: Block. tIneg> EXT 036 161
DTOC2: Block. tIneg>> EXT 036 162
DTOC2: Block. tIneg>>> EXT 036 163
DTOC2: Block. tIN> EXT 035 230
DTOC2: Block. tIN>> EXT 035 231
DTOC2: Block. tIN>>> EXT 035 232
DTOC2: Enabled 035 132
DTOC2: General starting 035 234
DTOC2: tGS elapsed 035 245
DTOC2: Starting A 035 134
DTOC2: Starting B 035 135
DTOC2: Starting C 035 141
DTOC2: Starting N 035 146
DTOC2: Starting I> 035 138
DTOC2: Starting I>> 035 139
DTOC2: Starting I>>> 035 149
DTOC2: Trip signal tI> 035 144
DTOC2: Trip signal tI>> 035 145
DTOC2: Trip signal tI>>> 035 158
DTOC2: Starting Ineg 036 164
DTOC2: Starting Ineg> 036 165
DTOC2: Starting Ineg>> 036 166
DTOC2: Starting Ineg>>> 036 167
DTOC2: tIneg> elapsed 036 168
DTOC2: tIneg>> elapsed 036 169
DTOC2: tIneg>>> elapsed 036 170
DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg> 036 171
DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>> 036 172
DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>>> 036 173
DTOC2: Starting IN> 035 152
DTOC2: Starting IN>> 035 153
DTOC2: Starting IN>>> 035 154
DTOC2: tIN> elapsed 035 159
DTOC2: tIN>> elapsed 035 225
DTOC2: tIN>>> elapsed 035 226
DTOC2: Trip signal tIN> 035 233
DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>> 035 246
DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>>> 035 247
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: Block. tIref,P> EXT 038 114 Fig. 3-81
protection 1 IDMT1: Block.tIref,neg> EXT 038 178 Fig. 3-82
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-13

(continued)
IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT 038 124 Fig. 3-83

IDMT1: Enabled 038 125 Fig. 3-76
IDMT1: General starting 038 115 Fig. 3-85
IDMT1: tGS elapsed 038 116 Fig. 3-85
IDMT1: Starting Iref,P> 038 110 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: Starting Iref,A> 038 117 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: Starting Iref,B> 038 118 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: Starting Iref,C> 038 119 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: tIref,P> elapsed 038 111 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: Hold time P running 038 112 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: Memory P clear 038 113 Fig. 3-81
IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg> 038 173 Fig. 3-82
IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed 038 174 Fig. 3-82
IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 038 177 Fig. 3-82
IDMT1: Hold time neg runn. 038 175 Fig. 3-82
IDMT1: Memory δneg‘ clear 038 176 Fig. 3-82
IDMT1: Starting Iref,N> 038 120 Fig. 3-83
IDMT1: tIref,N> elapsed 038 121 Fig. 3-83
IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,N> 038 126 Fig. 3-83
IDMT1: Hold time N running 038 122 Fig. 3-83
IDMT1: Memory N clear 038 123 Fig. 3-83
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT2: Block. tIref,P> EXT 038 134
protection 2 IDMT2: Block.tIref,neg> EXT 038 188
IDMT2: Block. tIref,N> EXT 038 144
IDMT2: Enabled 038 145
IDMT2: General starting 038 135
IDMT2: tGS elapsed 038 136
IDMT2: Starting Iref,P> 038 130
IDMT2: Starting Iref,A> 038 137
IDMT2: Starting Iref,B> 038 138
IDMT2: Starting Iref,C> 038 139
IDMT2: tIref,P> elapsed 038 131
IDMT2: Hold time P running 038 132
IDMT2: Memory P clear 038 133
IDMT2: Starting Iref,neg> 038 183
IDMT2: tIref,neg> elapsed 038 184
IDMT2: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 038 187
IDMT2: Hold time neg runn. 038 185
IDMT2: Memory δneg‘ clear 038 186
IDMT2: Starting Iref,N> 038 140
IDMT2: tIref,N> elapsed 038 141
IDMT2: Trip signal tIref,N> 038 146
IDMT2: Hold time N running 038 142
IDMT2: Memory N clear 038 143
8-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Thermal overload THRM1: Replica block EXT 039 150 Fig. 3-90
protection 1 THRM1: Reset replica EXT 039 122 Fig. 3-91
THRM1: Enabled 039 129 Fig. 3-88
THRM1: Not ready 039 154
THRM1: Reset replica 039 125 Fig. 3-91

THRM1: Buffer empty 039 128
THRM1: Starting k*Iref> 039 151 Fig. 3-90

THRM1: Within pre-trip time 039 153 Fig. 3-90
THRM1: Warning 039 124 Fig. 3-90
THRM1: Trip signal 039 123 Fig. 3-90
THRM1: Setting error,block. 039 126 Fig. 3-90
Measuring-circuit MCM_1: Enabled 036 194 Fig. 3-92

monitoring 1 MCM_1: Meas. circ. I faulty 036 198 Fig. 3-93
Measuring-circuit MCM_2: Enabled 036 195
monitoring 2 MCM_2: Meas. circ. I faulty 036 199
Limit value monitoring 1 LIM_1: Enabled 040 123 Fig. 3-95

LIM_1: tI> elapsed 040 122 Fig. 3-95
LIM_1: tI>> elapsed 037 201 Fig. 3-95
LIM_1: tI< elapsed 037 202 Fig. 3-95
LIM_1: tI<< elapsed 037 203 Fig. 3-95
Limit value monitoring 2 LIM_2: Enabled 040 125
LIM_2: tI> elapsed 040 124
LIM_2: tI>> elapsed 038 201
LIM_2: tI< elapsed 038 202
LIM_2: tI<< elapsed 038 203
Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig. 3-97

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig. 3-97

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-15

(continued)
LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig. 3-96

LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig. 3-96

LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060
LOGIC: 1 has been set 034 067 Fig. 3-96

LOGIC: 2 has been set 034 068
LOGIC: 1 set externally 034 075 Fig. 3-96

LOGIC: 2 set externally 034 076
LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig. 3-97

LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig. 3-97
LOGIC: Output 2 042 033 Fig. 3-97
8-16 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 3 042 034
LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 064
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-17

(continued)
8-18 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
8.2 Control and Testing
Local control panel LOC: Param. change enabl. 003 010
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
"Logical" communication COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test 003 180 Fig. 3-13

interface 1 Signal selection for testing purposes.
COMM1: Test spont.sig.start 003 184 Fig. 3-13
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘start‘).
COMM1: Test spont.sig. end 003 186 Fig. 3-13
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘end‘).
"Logical" communication COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test 103 180 Fig. 3-15

interface 2 Signal selection for testing purposes.
COMM2: Test spont.sig.start 103 184 Fig. 3-15
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘start‘).
COMM2: Test spont.sig. end 103 186 Fig. 3-15
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘end‘).
"Logical" communication COMM3: Reset No. tel.errors 120 037
interface 3 COMM3: Send signal for test 120 050
COMM3: Log. state for test 120 051
COMM3: Send signal, test 120 053
COMM3: Loop back send 120 055
COMM3: Loop back test 120 054
COMM3: Hold time for test 120 052
Binary and analog outputs OUTP: Reset latch. USER 021 009 Fig. 3-21
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.

OUTP: Relay assign. f.test 003 042 Fig. 3-22
Selection of the relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay test 003 043 Fig. 3-22
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OU T P: Ho ld -
t i m e f o r tes t).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
OUTP: Hold-time for test 003 044 Fig. 3-22
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-19

(continued)
Main function MAIN: General reset 003 002 Fig. 3-39
Reset of the following memories:

! All counters
! LED indicators
! Operating data memory
! All event memories
! Event counters
! Fault data
! Measured overload data
! Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-
Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER 021 010 Fig. 3-39
Reset of the following displays:

! LED indicators
! Fault data
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER 021 005 Fig. 3-36
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Reset c. cl./trip c. 003 007 Fig. 3-37
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Reset IP,max,stored 003 033 Fig. 3-25
The display for the stored maximum phase current is reset.

MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER 003 040 Fig. 3-36
A trip command is issued from the local control panel for 100 ms. This
setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected
Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
Note:
The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
MAIN: Warm restart 003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold restart 000 085
A cold restart is executed. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with
which the device operates after a cold restart are the underlined default
settings given in the ‘Range of Values’ column in the Address List. They
are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart.
8-20 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset recording 100 001 Fig. 3-43
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset recording 003 008 Fig. 3-44
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset recording 100 003 Fig. 3-48
Reset of the overload memory.
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig. 3-53
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset recording 003 006 Fig. 3-54

! LED indicators
! Fault memory
! Fault counter
! Fault data
! Recorded fault values
Thermal overload THRM1: Reset replica USER 039 120 Fig. 3-91
protection 1 Reset of the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection 1.
Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig. 3-97

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig. 3-97
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-21

(continued)
8.3 Operating Data Recording
Operating data recording OP_RC: Operat. data record. 003 024 Fig. 3-43
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Mon. Signal record. 003 001 Fig. 3-44
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-22 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
8.4 Event counters
"Logical" communication COMM3: No. telegram errors 120 042
interface 3
Main functions MAIN: No. general start. 004 000 Fig. 3-35
Number of general starting signals.

MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 004 006 Fig. 3-37
Number of general trip commands 1.



Operating data recording OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. 100 002 Fig. 3-43
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: No. monit. signals 004 019 Fig. 3-44
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101 Fig. 3-47
Number of overload events.
Fault recording FT_RC: No. of faults 004 020 Fig. 3-53
Number of faults.
FT_RC: No. system disturb. 004 010 Fig. 3-53
Number of system disturbances.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC1: No. general start. 009 150 Fig. 3-74
protection DTOC2: No. general start. 009 160
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: No. general start. 009 151 Fig. 3-86
protection IDMT2: No. general start. 009 161
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-23

(continued)
8.5 Measured Fault Data
Overload data acquisition OL_DA: Overload duration 004 102 Fig. 3-45
Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: Status THRM1 replica 004 155 Fig. 3-46
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

THRM1 or THRM2, respectively.
OL_DA: Load current THRM1 004 159 Fig. 3-46
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
OL_DA: Object temp. THRM1 004 156 Fig. 3-46
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function

THRM1 or THRM2, respectively.
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1 004 158 Fig. 3-46
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, will reach the tripping threshold.
OL_DA: Offset THRM1 replica 004 191 Fig. 3-46
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Fault duration 008 010 Fig. 3-49
Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running time 004 021 Fig. 3-49
Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Fault determ. with 004 198 Fig. 3-50
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.

FT_DA: Run time to meas. 004 199 Fig. 3-50
This display indicates the difference in time between the start of the fault
and the fault data acquisition time.
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,a p.u. 025 086 Fig. 3-51
Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end a,
referred to Inom.
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,b p.u. 025 087 Fig. 3-51
Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end b,
referred to Inom.
8-24 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,a p.u. 026 086 Fig. 3-51
Display of the residual current calculated by the P630C at the data

acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents, end a, referred to
Inom.
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,b p.u. 026 087 Fig. 3-51
Display of the residual current calculated by the P630C at the data

acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents, end b, referred to
Inom.
FT_DA: Diff. current 1 005 082 Fig. 3-52
Display of the differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.



FT_DA: Diff.current 1(2*f0) 005 083 Fig. 3-52
Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current,

measuring system 1, referred to Iref.


Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current,



FT_DA: Restrain. current 1 007 084 Fig. 3-52
Display of the restraining current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.


P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 8-25

(continued)
8.6 Event recording
Overload recording OL_RC: Overload recording 1 033 020 Fig. 3-48

OL_RC: Overload recording 2 033 021 Fig. 3-48
Point of entry into the overload log.
Fault recording FT_RC: Fault recording 1 003 000 Fig. 3-54

FT_RC: Fault recording 2 033 001 Fig. 3-54
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-26 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
9 Commissioning
9.1 Safety Instructions
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut as the ground connection.
The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum conductor cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected,
always disconnect the device from the supply.
the resulting voltages will endanger people and damage the insulation.
Therefore always short-circuit the current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-1

9 Commissioning
(continued)
!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the unit is shut off.
!
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently the socket
does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required
per VDE 0106 Part 101.
!
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data').
9-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Commissioning Tests
Preparation
After the P630C has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
! Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?

! Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the device?
! Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see section entitled ‘Self-Monitoring’ in Chapter 3). The LED indicator
labeled ‘HEALTHY’ (H1) and the LED indicator labeled ‘OUT OF SERVICE’ (H2) will
light up. (The LED indicator H2 is coupled to the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y . )
After approximately 15 s, the P630C is ready for operation. This is indicated by the
display 'P630C' in the first line of the LCD.
Once the change-enabling command has been issued (see the Section Change-
Enabling Function in Chapter 6), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering
settings from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-3

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the
P630C and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made
from the integrated local control panel.
! ‘Par/DvID/’ folder:
" DVICE: Device password 1
" DVICE: Device password 2
! ‘Par/Conf/’ folder:
" PC: Name of manufacturer
" PC: Bay address
" PC: Device address
" PC: Baud rate
" PC: Parity bit
" COMM1: Function group COMM1
" COMM1: General enable USER
" COMM1: Name of manufacturer
" COMM1: Line idle state
" COMM1: Baud rate
" COMM1: Parity bit
" COMM1: Communicat. protocol
" COMM1: Octet comm. address
" COMM1: Octet address ASDU
" COMM2: Function group COMM2
" COMM2: General enable USER
" COMM2: Name of manufacturer
" COMM2: Line idle state
" COMM2: Baud rate
" COMM2: Parity bit
" COMM2: Octet comm. address
" COMM2: Octet comm. ASDU
9-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
! ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder:
" PC: Command blocking

" PC: Sig./meas.val.block
" COMM1: Command block. USER
" C O M M 1 : S i g . / m e a s . b l o c k .U S E R
" COMM2: Command block. USER
" C O M M 2 : S i g . / m e a s . b l o c k .U S E R
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.
Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before blocking is canceled:
! Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
! Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
! Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
! Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
! Have all settings been made correctly?
Now the block can be cleared as follows ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder):
! M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e "Yes (on)"
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-5

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P630C, it is possible to determine
whether the P630C is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.
If the user does not wish to operate the circuit breaker during the protection functions
test, the trip commands can be blocked through M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R
('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit
breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for 100 ms through
M A I N : M a n . t r i p c m d . U S E R ('Oper/CtrlTest' folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local
control panel is password-protected (see Section Password-Protected Control Actions in
Chapter 6).
Note: The manual trip command is only executed if it has been configured for trip
command 1 or 2.
If the P630C is connected to substation control level, it is advisable to activate the test
mode via MAIN: T e s t m o d e U S E R ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (cause of
transmission: test mode).
Checking the binary signal

inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder), it is possible to
determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized correctly by the P630C.
The values displayed have the following meanings:
! Low: Not energized.

! High: Energized.
! Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in 'Oper/CtrlTest/' folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f . t e s t, ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (Oper/CtrlTest/' folder). It is
password-protected (see the section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Operations’ in
Chapter 6).
!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
9-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the current-

measuring inputs
By applying appropriate analog signals as ‘measuring variables’ to the measuring inputs,
the user can check via the operating data displays (see Chapter ‘Information and Control
Functions’) whether the protection and control unit detects the analog signals with the
specified accuracy (folder ‘Oper/Cycl/Data/’):
! M A I N : C u r r e n t I A , a p . u . : Display of the updated phase current A of end a
referred to the nominal device current Inom
! M A I N : C u r r e n t I B , a p . u . : Display of the updated phase current B of end a

! M A I N : C u r r e n t I C , a p . u . : Display of the updated phase current C of end a

! M A I N : C u r r e n t I A , b p . u . : Display of the updated phase current A of end b

! M A I N : C u r r e n t I B , b p . u . : Display of the updated phase current B of end b

! M A I N : C u r r e n t I C , b p . u . : Display of the updated phase current C of end b

!
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see the Chapter on Technical
Data).
Checking the protection

function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P630C, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The activated parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m .
s u b s e t ('Oper/Cycl/Log/" folder).
A protection function can only be checked if it is included in the configuration and then
enabled as a function group and furthermore enabled as part of the active parameter
subset.
When testing the protection device with a testing device, the measuring-circuit
monitoring functions should be deactivated (M C M _ 1 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R
a n d M C M _ 2 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R , folder ‘Par/Func/Gen/’) since it would
otherwise always operate and thus, depending on the setting, issue fault signals.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-7

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking differential
protection
For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the tripping
characteristic of the P630C so that the basic threshold value is always checked for.
The current I to which the P630C responds for single-side feed is calculated as follows:
Idiff >
Ix,z = ⋅ Inom,z
k am,z
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P630C are displayed as
measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P630C
to the system current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID are correct.
The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall
below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user:
k am,z ⋅ Ix,z
Id,y =
Inom,z
1 k am,z ⋅ Ix,z
IR,y = ⋅
2 Inom,z
For single-side one-phase feed, another matching factor in accordance with the set
vector group ID and the set zero-sequence current filtering needs to be taken into
account in addition to the amplitude-matching factor. The threshold current Ix,z is
Idiff >
Ix,z = ⋅ Inom,z
k am,z ⋅ k s,z
The associated matching factor ks,z is given in the tables below.
The differential and restraining currents to be displayed as measured operating data are
k am,z ⋅ k s,z ⋅ Ix,z

Id,y =
Inom,z
1 k am,z ⋅ k s,z ⋅ Ix,z

IR,y = ⋅
2 Inom,z
9-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
where:
x: Phase A, B or C
y: Measuring system 1, 2 or 3
z: Transformer end a or b
Ix,z: Test current phase x transformer end z
Inom,z: Nominal current transformer end z
kam,z: Amplitude-matching factor transformer end z
ks,z: Matching factor in accordance with the set vector group ID and
the set zero-sequence current filtering (see tables) transformer end z
Idiff>: Operate value of the differential protection function
Id,y: Differential current measuring system y as displayed
IR,y: Restraining current measuring system y as displayed
Matching factor ks,z for the individual measuring systems y as a function of the supplied
phase x for the high-voltage side:
x=A x=B x=C

y=1 y=2 y=3 y=1 y=2 y=3 y=1 y=2 y=3
1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67
Without Izero filtering / with Izero filtering
Matching factor ks,z for the individual measuring systems y as a function of the supplied
phase x and as a function of the set vector group for the low-voltage side in question:
Vector x=A x=B x=C

Group
y=1 y=2 y=3 y=1 y=2 y=3 y=1 y=2 y=3
0 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67
1 0.91/0.58 0.33/0 0.24/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.91/0.58 0.33/0 0.33/0 0.24/0.58 0.91/0.58
2 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33
3 0.33/0 0.91/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.33/0 0.91/0.58 0.91/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.33/0
4 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33
5 0.24/0.58 0.91/0.58 0/0.33 0/0.33 0.24/0.58 0.91/0.58 0.91/0.58 0/0.33 0.24/0.58
6 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67
7 0.24/0.58 0/0.33 0.91/0.58 0.91/0.58 0.24/0.58 0/0.33 0/0.33 0.91/0.58 0.24/0.58
8 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33
9 0/0.33 0.24/0.58 0.91/0.58 0.91/0.58 0/0.33 0.24/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.91/0.58 0/0.33
10 0/0.33 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33 0/0.33 1/0.67 1/0.67 0/0.33 0/0.33
11 0.91/0.58 0.24/0.58 0/0.33 0.33/0 0.91/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.24/0.58 0.33/0 0.91/0.58
Without Izero filtering / with Izero filtering
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-9

9 Commissioning
(continued)
In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P630C will trip as follows, if a
value of Idiff>> or Idiff>>> is exceeded.
! Id>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint

! Id>>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the restraining current and
regardless of all other restraints
9-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
The connection of the phase currents can be checked using the phase angles provided
as measured operating data by the P630C.
With an ideally symmetrical load through the transformer, the phase angles between the
phase currents of a given end must be displayed as follows, depending on the rotary
field direction in the system:
Clockwise Rotating Field Counterclockwise Rotating Field

ϕ AB,z = ϕBC,z = ϕCA,z = 120° ϕ AB,z = ϕBC,z = ϕCA,z = −120°
The setting of the function parameter for direction of rotating field has no effect in this
case.
The phase angles of a given phase between the phase currents of two ends must be
displayed as follows, depending on the transformer vector group:
Vector Group
0 = 12 ϕ x,a − z = ±180°
1 ϕ x,a − z = −150°
2 ϕ x,a − z = −120°
3 ϕ x,a − z = −90°
4 ϕ x,a − z = −60°
5 ϕ x,a − z = −30°
6 ϕ x,a − z = ±0°
7 ϕ x,a − z = 30°
8 ϕ x,a − z = 60°
9 ϕ x,a − z = 90°
10 ϕ x,a − z = 120°
11 ϕ x,a − z = 150°
The rotary field direction in the system has no effect in this case. On the other hand, a
change in the setting of the function parameter for the connection direction of a given
main current transformer set affects the corresponding measured operating value by
±180°.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the definite-time

function
By applying appropriate measuring variables, the overcurrent stages and the associated
timer stages can be tested.
!
Data).
Checking the inverse-time

function
By applying appropriate measuring variables, the overcurrent stages and the associated
time delays can be tested.
!
Data).
9-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the thermal

overload protection
function
By applying appropriate measuring variables, the reference current and the associated
time delay can be tested.
!
Data).
In order to test the thermal overload protection function, first clear the thermal replica.
Clearing the thermal replica is achieved by briefly disabling the protection function
(M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e set to No, folder ‘Par/Func/Glob/’). The updated status of the
thermal replica can be interrogated via the operating data display T H ER M : T h e r m .
r e p l i c a ve r s . ( folder ‘Oper/Cycl/Data/’) The trip time can be checked.
With cleared thermal replica, the test current is changed abruptly from 0 to a value
of ≥ 0.1 Iref. The following parameters and data will govern the tripping time:
! The set reference current Iref according to

THRM1: Iref PSx.
! The set thermal time constant τ according to
THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx.
! The set tripping level ∆ϑtrip according to
THRM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx
! Initial state ∆ϑ0 of the thermal replica according to the operating data display
T H R M 1 : S t a n d A b b i l d , T H 1 . With cleared thermal replica, this value is zero.
! The updated measured coolant temperature Θa according to the set default
THRM1: Default CTA PSx.
! The set maximum permissible coolant temperature Θa,max according to
THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx.
! The set maximum permissible object temperature Θmax according to
THRM1: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx.
2
 I 
  − ∆ϑ0
t = τ ⋅ ln  Iref 
2
 I   Θ a − Θ a,max 
  − ∆ϑ trip ⋅ 1 − 

 Iref   Θmax − Θ a,max 
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9-13

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Completion of
commissioning
Before the P630C is released for operation, the user should make sure that the following
steps have been taken:
! All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in 'Oper/CtrlTest/ folder.)
! Blocking of output relays has been canceled.
(O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R in 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'No')
! Blocking of the trip command has been canceled.
(M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'No')
! The device is on-line
(M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘Yes’ (on).)
! The measuring-circuit monitoring function is enabled – if it was disabled for testing

purposes. (M C M _ 1 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R a n d M C M _ 2 : G e n e r a l
e n a b l e U S E R , folder ‘Par/Func/Gen/’, setting 'Yes')
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’
(H1) should be on.
9-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P630C to the manufacturer. Please follow the
packaging instructions in the section entitled ‘Unpacking and Packing’ in Chapter 5 when
returning equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
! Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.

" Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
Before checking further, disconnect the P630C from the power supply.
!
The local control panel is connected to the I/O module by a plug-in connecting cable.
Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable.
" Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The
P630C has an auxiliary voltage supply that can be switched between ranges and
is factory-set for the voltage range of VA,nom = 110 to 250 V DC or 100 to 230 V
AC. See Chapter 5 for information on switching to the voltage range of VA,nom = 24
to 60 V DC . The P630C is protected against damage from polarity reversal.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
! The P630C issues a ‘Warning’ signal on LED H3. (H3 is labeled ‘ALARM’,
it is coupled to the signal SF MON : Wa rn ing ( L ED) .)
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the
section entitled ‘Monitoring Signal Memory Readout’ in Chapter 6). The table below
lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the
P630C response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.
SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070
Warning configured for LED H3.

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100
Warning configured for an output relay.
Key
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n m . f a u l t .
2)
: The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
SFMON: Cold restart 093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
SFMON: Blocking HW failure 090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
10-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: –/–

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
The hardware clock has failed.

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: –/–
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
SFMON: Power supply faulty 093 083
The +24 V or +15 V or -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a
minimum value.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Module in wrong slot.
Defective module in slot x.

SFMON: Module A DPR faulty 093 070
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

SFMON: Module A RAM faulty 093 071
RAM fault on communication module A.

Output relay K xxx defective.

10-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
Undefined operation code, i.e. software error.
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation, i.e. software error.
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
Undefined interrupt, i.e. software error.
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.
SFMON: Data acquis. failure 090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module
(digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is
detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are
deleted.
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
Software overloaded.

SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

SFMON: IRIGB faulty 093 117
Although the IRIG-B interface is enabled, no plausible input signal is

received.

SFMON: Time-out module L 093 130
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the local control

component. It has detected an error.

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. L 093 131
Incorrect or invalid software for the local control component has been
downloaded.

10-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMONSFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 091 018
Multiple signaling: current-measuring circuits faulty.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a 091 026
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the current-measuring

circuits of end a.

SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b 091 027
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the current-measuring

circuits of end b.

SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140
The set time CO MM 3 : T im e-o u t com m .fa ul t has elapsed since the
most recent 100% valid telegram was received. The receive signals are set
to their user-defined default values.

SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
The device has detected a hardware fault in the InterMiCOM interface

("Logical" Communication Interface 3).

SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142
Timer stage CO MM 3 : T im e-o u t l ink fa i l . has elapsed indicating a

persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.

SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141
The operate threshold COM M3 : Li m it te le gr . erro rs has been

exceeded. The receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Iref, a inval. range 091 007
SFMON: Iref, b inval. range 091 008
The reference current determined by the P630C for differential protection is

not within the permissible range.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Device blocking

SFMON: Matching fail. end a 091 000
SFMON: Matching fail. end b 091 001
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection

function is above the permissible range.

SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv. 091 006
The second largest amplitude matching factor of the differential protection

function is lower than permitted.

SFMON: Setting error THRM1 098 038
The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum

permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value. This
setting is not valid.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the thermal

overload protection function
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
10-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
The P630C is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Routine functional testing

The P630C is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely checked for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Additional functional tests should be performed at
intervals of 2 to 3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P630C incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without running a test from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and setting parameters must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits

The analog measured variables are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-
aliasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-
monitoring function, the measuring-circuit monitoring function that is available for the
device’s general functions can detect deviations in many cases, depending on the
parameter settings for sensitivity. However, it is still necessary to test from the device
terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are functioning
correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A “small” measured value (such as the nominal current in the
current path) and a “large” measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the voltage
path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it
possible to check the entire control range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and the
phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This can best be
done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a two-phase
ungrounded fault. For this test, the short-circuit current should be dimensioned so that a
loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the device terminals with the set
impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing instrument that correctly replicates the two-
phase ungrounded fault should be used for this purpose.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few
less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting
characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely
digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
Binary inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the all-or-nothing relays. There is no monitoring
function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be
triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing
purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special
control function (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
!
Before starting testing, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
11-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of -25°C to
+70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see chapter entitled
'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither condensation
nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be reformed every 4 years. Reform the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P630C for approximately 10 minutes.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 12-1

12-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P630C is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied with
the P630C. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.

Operating program for Windows On request
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 13-1

13-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
14 Order Information
MiCOM P630C
Name Order number
Transformer Differential Protection P6 3 0 - 9 8 9 0 0 0 0 -301 -401 -601 -46x -9 x -9 x -8xx
Basic device:
Compact Device 9
with 2 binary inputs and 8 output relays
Mounting option and display:

Surface- and flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 8
Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13, T21...T23) 2) 9
Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 ... 60 VDC or 110 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 1) 2
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

18 V (standard variant) Without order extension no.
90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) 8) -461
155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) 8) -462
With communication / information interface:

Only IRIG-B input For clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 only -91
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector 4
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1

For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector 4
Language:
English (German) 4) Without order extension no.
Px40 English (English) 4) On request -800
German (English) 4) -801
French (English) 4) On request -802
Spanish (English) 4) On request -803
Polish (English) 4) On request -804
Russian (English) 4) 7) On request -805
1) Range selection via jumper, default setting underlined!

2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardwareoption, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 14-1

(Fortsetzung)
Notes on the Ordering Options
Language Versions
For a display of the Russian data model (menu texts), order extension No. -805 must be
specified with the order. The device will then be fitted with the hardware supporting
Cyrillic characters. The English reference texts are fully supported by this hardware
option but additional characters in other West European languages are not. The Russian
/ English language version is therefore not suited to a subsequent loading of West
European data models.
Operate Value of the Binary Inputs

The standard variant of the binary inputs (optical couplers) operates for all input voltages
of 18 V and above and is therefore recommended for most applications. The special
variants with higher operate / release values (see "Technical Data") are designed for
applications with a special requirement for operate values of 60 to 70 % Vnom.
14-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

Appendix
A Glossary
B List of Signals
C Terminal Connection Diagrams
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 AP-1

Appendix
(continued)
A Glossary A-1
A1 Function Groups A-1
A2 Symbols A-2
A3 Examples of Signal Names A-9
A4 Symbols Used A-10
B List of Signals B-1

B1 Internal Signal Names B-1
B2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or B-2
IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
B 2.1 Interoperability B-2
B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) B-2
B 2.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-3
B 2.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-4
B 2.1.4 Application Layer B-5
B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions B-11
B3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 B-14
B 3.1 Interoperability B-14
B 3.1.1 Physical Layer B-14
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface B-14
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface B-14
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate B-14
B 3.1.2 Link Layer B-15
B 3.1.3 Application Layer B-15
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data B-15
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU B-15
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor B-15
Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction B-15
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction B-16
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor B-17
Direction
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-18
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-19
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction B-21
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction B-21
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction B-22
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control B-23
Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction B-23
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction B-23
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction B-24
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions B-25
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous B-25
C Terminal Connection Diagrams C-1

C1 Terminal Connection Diagrams for the P630C C-1
AP-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

Appendix A - Glossary
A1 Function Groups

DIFF: Differential protection
DVICE: Device
FT_DA: Fault data acquisition
FT_RC: Fault recording
F_KEY: Function keys
INP: Binary inputs
IRIGB: IRIG-B interface
LED: LED indicators
LOC: Local control panel
LOGIC: Logic
MAIN: Main functions
MT_RC: Monitoring signal recording
OL_DA: Overload data acquisition
OL_RC: Overload recording
OP_RC: Operating data recording
OUTP: Binary outputs
PC: PC link
PSS: Parameter subset selection
SFMON: Self-monitoring
THRM1: Thermal overload protection 1
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 A-1

(continued)
A2 Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements according to DIN 40900 Part 12, September 1992,
IEC 617-12: amended 1991
Analog information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981
To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been
used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other
flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the
signal flow, output signals on the right side.
Symbol Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of

related elements, contours of the elements may be
joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose

= common contour line is oriented in the signal flow
direction.
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations
with two or more signal flow directions, such as for
symbols with a control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements

whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the
signal flow direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination
and one or more qualifiers.
A-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Symbol Description
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to
several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of
several trigger elements, for example.
Output block
An output block contains an output function common
to several symbols.
Settable control block

The four digits represent the address under which the
function shown in the text after the colon may be set
via the local control panel.
Settable control block with function blocks

The digits in the function block show the settings that
are possible at this address.
The text below the symbol shows the setting and the
corresponding unit or meaning.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 A-3

(continued)
Symbol Description
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is
effective.
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the
output.
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
Dynamic input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is
effective.
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables
are 1.
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input
variable is 1.
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input
variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be
replaced by any other number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input
variable is 1.
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any

other number if the number of inputs is increased or
decreased accordingly.
A-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Symbol Description
Delay element
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values

(in seconds or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable
changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for
100 ms, independent of the duration of the input
value 1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block the monostable flip-

flop is retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be

changed to any other duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary
signal.
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the two
input variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the
minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal

The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal
exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable
remains 1 until the input signal drops below the
threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 A-5

(continued)
Symbol Description
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse
sequence is generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse

sequence starts with the input variable transition
(synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence
ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the input
(synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is
also 1.
Band pass filter

The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the
input signals. All other frequencies (above and below
50 Hz) are attenuated.
Counter
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1
are counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable
from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive
in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter

with electrical isolation between input and output.
L+ = pos. voltage input
L- = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
A-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Symbol Description
Input transformer
with phase and item identifiers
(according to DIN EN 60445)
Phase identifiers for current inputs:

for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Phase identifiers for voltage inputs

via transformer 1:
for A: 1U
for B: 1V
for C: 1W
for N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Item identifiers for current transformers:

for A: T1
for B: T2
for C: T3
for N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for A: T5
for B: T6
for C: T7
for N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with item identifier
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement
(‘closed-circuit operation’).
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 A-7

(continued)
Symbol Description
PC interface
with pin connections
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication
of the two input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of
the two input variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) are equal to the function in the function
block.
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
A-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
A3 Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter 3 as follows:
Signal Name Description
! FT_RC: Fault recording n Internal signal names are not coded by a data model
305 100
address. In the block diagrams they are marked with
a diamond. The small figure underneath the signal
name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are
listed in Appendix B.
DIST: VNG>> triggered Signal names coded by a data model address are
[ 036 015 ] represented by their address (shown in square
brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.
MAIN: General reset A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its
[ 003 002 ] signal name, address, and the setting preceded by
!1: Execute the setting arrow.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 A-9

(continued)
A4 Symbols Used
Symbol Meaning
t Time duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I Complex current
Z Complex impedance
Z Modulus of complex impedance
f Frequency
Σ Sum, result
Ω Unit of electrical resistance
α Angle
ϕ Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a

defined current and a defined voltage or with two defined
currents.
Θ Absolute temperature in °C
∆ϑ Relative temperature rise in %
τ Time constant
A-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

Appendix B - List of Signals
B 1 Internal Signal Names
DIFF: Sound match Fig. 3-57

DIFF: I(2*f0),1 Fig. 3-64
DIFF: I(2*f0),2 Fig. 3-64
DIFF: I(2*f0),3 Fig. 3-64
DIFF: I(5*f0),1 Fig. 3-66
DIFF: I(5*f0),2 Fig. 3-66
DIFF: I(5*f0),3 Fig. 3-66
DIFF: Id,1 Fig. 3-61
DIFF: IR,1 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Reset LED Fig. 3-39
MAIN: Protection active Fig. 3-30
MAIN: Time tag Fig. 3-38
MAIN: Blck.1 sel.functions Fig. 3-32
COMM1: Selected protocol Fig. 3-6
FT_DA: Save measured values Fig. 3-50
THRM1: I Fig. 3-90
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-1

(continued)
B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol
interface for substation control systems.
B 2.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets
are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of octets
in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined
parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given
application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different
manufacturers (“equipment stemming”), then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked.
Note: The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific
parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured
values.
B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
! Point-to-point configuration ! Multipoint-party line configuration
! Multiple point-to-point configuration Multipoint-star configuration
B-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
B 2.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction) 1
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
100 bit/s ! 2 400 bit/s 2 400 bit/s 56 000 bit/s
300 bit/s ! 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
! 600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
! 1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
300 bit/s ! 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
! 600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
! 1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
1
The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-3
(continued)
B 2.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Link Transmission Procedure Address Field of the Link
! Balanced transmission ! Not present

(balanced transmission only)
! Unbalanced transmission ! One octet
! Two octets 1
Frame Length ! Structured
240 Maximum length L (number of octets) ! Unstructured
1
Balanced only.
B-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
(continued)
B 2.1.4 Application Layer
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
! One octet ! Two octets
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)
! One octet ! Structured
! Two octets ! Unstructured
! Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
! One octet ! Two octets (with originator address)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-5

(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
! <1> = Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
! <2> = Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
! <3> = Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
! <4> = Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1

=
! <5> = Step position information M_ST_NA_1
! <6> = Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
! <7> = Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
! <8> = Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
! <9> = Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
! <10> = Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
! <11> = Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
! <12> = Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
<13> = Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> = Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
! <15> = Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
! <16> = Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
! <17> = Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
B-6 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
! <18> = Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag ME_EP_TB_1
! <19> = Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
<20> = Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1
<21> = Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-7

(continued)
Process Information in Monitor Direction 1 (Station-Specific Parameter)
! <45> = Single command C_SC_NA_1
! <46> = Double command C_DC_NA_1
! <47> = Regulating step command C_IT_NA_1
<48> = Set point command, normalized value C_RC_NA_1
<49> = Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
<50> = Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
<51> = Bit string of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
! <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.
B-8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
! <100> = Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
! <101> = Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
! <102> = Read command C_RD_NA_1
! <103> = Clock synchronization command 1 C_CS_NA_1
! <104> = Test command C_TS_NB_1
<105> = Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
<106> = Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
1
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-9
(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
! <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
! <111> = Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
<112> = Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
<113> = Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
<120> = File ready F_FR_NA_1
<121> = Section ready F_SR_NA_1
<122> = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
<123> = Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
<124> = Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
<125> = Segment F_SG_NA_1
<126> = Directory F_DR_TA_1
B-10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
! Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
! Global
! Group 1 ! Group 7 ! Group 13
! Group 5 ! Group 11
! Group 6 ! Group 12 Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
! Clock synchronization
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-11

(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
! Direct command transmission Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission Select and execute set point command
C_SE ACTTERM used
! No additional definition
Short pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)
Counter request ! General request counter
! Counter freeze without reset ! Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset ! Request counter group 2
Counter reset ! Request counter group 3
Addresses per group have to be specified ! Request counter group 4
B-12 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
! Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
File transfer in monitor direction] F_FR_NA_1
File transfer in control direction] F_FR_NA_1
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-13

(continued)
B 3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P630C.
B 3.1 Interoperability
B 3.1.1 Physical Layer
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface
! EIA RS 485
! No. of loads 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed
information see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface
! Glass fiber
! Plastic fiber
! F-SMA connector
BFOC/2.5 connector
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate
! 9 600 bit/s
! 19 200 bit/s
B-14 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
B 3.1.2 Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.
B 3.1.3 Application Layer
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU
! One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF Description
! <0> End of general interrogation
! <0> Time synchronization
! <2> Reset FCB
! <3> Reset CU
! <4> Start / restart
<5> Power on
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-15

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction
´ Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 1 Designations as in the Device Address List

INF Semantics Address Descriptor
<16> Auto-recloser active
<17> Teleprotection active
! <18> Protection active 003 030 MAIN: Protection enabled
! <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
! <20> Monitor direction blocked 037 075 COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.
! <21> Test mode 037 071 MAIN: Test mode
<22> Local parameter setting
! <23> Characteristic 1 036 090 PSS: PS 1 active
! <27> Auxiliary input 1 034 000 LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
1
Different designations are used, for example, in IEC 60870-5-103 Annex A (phase A rather than L1).
B-16 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction
Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 Designations as in the Device Address List

<32> Measurand supervision I
<33> Measurand supervision V
<35> Phase sequence supervision
! <36>1 Trip circuit supervision 041 200 SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
<37> I>> back-up operation
<38> VT fuse failure
<39> Teleprotection disturbed
! <46> Group warning 036 100 SFMON: Warning (relay)
! <47> Group alarm 004 065 MAIN: Blocked/faulty
1
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-17
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 1 Designations as in the Device Address List

<48> Earth fault L1
<49> Earth fault L2
<50> Earth fault L3
<51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line
<52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
1
B-18 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

<64> Start /pick-up L1
<67> Start /pick-up N
! <68> General trip 036 071 MAIN: Gen. trip command 1
<69> Trip L1
<70> Trip L2
<71> Trip L3
<72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)
<73> Fault location X in ohms
<74> Fault forward/line
<75> Fault reverse/busbar
<76> Teleprotection signal transmitted
<77> Teleprotection signal received
<78> Zone 1
<79> Zone 2
<80> Zone 3
<81> Zone 4
<82> Zone 5
1
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-19
(continued)

<83> Zone 6
! <84> General start/pick-up 036 000 MAIN: General starting
<85> Breaker failure 036 017 CBF: CB failure
! <86> Trip measuring system L1 041 002 DIFF: Trip signal 1
<89> Trip measuring system E
<90> Trip I>
<91> Trip I>>
<92> Trip IN>
<93> Trip IN>>
B-20 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction

<128> CB ‘on’ by AR
<129> CB ‘on’ by long-time AR
<130> AR blocked
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction

<144> Measurand I
<145> Measurands I, V
<146> Measurands I, V, P, Q
<147> Measurands IN, VEN
<148> Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-21

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8

INF Semantics
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> End of general interrogation of generic data
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry aborted
B-22 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction

INF Semantics
! <0> Initiation of general interrogation
! <0> Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction

<16> Auto-recloser on/off
<17> Teleprotection on/off
! <18> Protection on/off 003 030 MAIN: Protection enabled
! <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
! <23>1 Activate characteristic 1 003 060 PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
1
Switches PSS: Select PS USER to "Parameter set 1"
2
3
4
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-23
(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction

INF Semantics
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> General interrogation of generic data
<248> Write entry
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry abort
B-24 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions
! Test mode
! Blocking of monitor direction
! Disturbance data
Generic services
! Private data
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can
be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words,
there is only one choice for each measurand.
Measurand Measured value Max. MVAL =

nom. value multiplied by
Designations as in Designations as in the
1
IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 Device Address List
1.2 or 2.4
Current L1 Current A
Current L2 Current B
Current L3 Current C
Voltage L1-E Voltage A-G
Voltage L2-E Voltage B-G
Voltage L3-E Voltage C-G
Active power P Active power P
Reactive power Q Reactive power Q
Frequency f Frequency f
Voltage L1-L2 Voltage A-B
1
IEC 60870-5-103 Annex also uses phase A rather than L1.
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 B-25

B-26 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams
C 1 Terminal Connection Diagrams
C-1 Terminal connection diagram P630C, diagram P630C.401, (part 1 of 3)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 C-1

(continued)
C-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

(continued)
P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 C-3

C-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P630C/EN M/C11 Version: -601 11/2011
MiCOM P630C
P630C/EN AD/C21
Version P630C -301 -401 -602
Upgrade Documentation
P630C, Changes in Software Version -601 to -602
Contents
1 Overview ......................................................................................................... U-5
2 Operation ........................................................................................................ U-9

2.1 Local Control Panel (Function Group LOC)..................................................... U-9
2.2 Serial Interfaces ............................................................................................. U-10
2.2.1 Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3) ................................. U-10
2.3 Main Functions of the P630C (Function Group MAIN) .................................. U-11
2.3.1 Operating Data Measurement........................................................................ U-11
2.3.2 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization ..................................................... U-12
2.3.3 Resetting Mechanisms................................................................................... U-13
2.4 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) .................................................... U-16
3 Settings ......................................................................................................... U-17

3.1 Parameters..................................................................................................... U-17
3.1.1 Device Identification ....................................................................................... U-17
3.1.2 Configuration Parameters .............................................................................. U-17
3.1.3 Function Parameters...................................................................................... U-18
4 Information and Control Functions............................................................ U-19

4.1 Operation ....................................................................................................... U-19
4.1.1 Cyclic Values.................................................................................................. U-19
4.1.2 Control and Testing........................................................................................ U-20
P630C/EN AD/C21 // AFSV.12.10301 D /// P630C-301-401-602 U-3

(continued)
In the new version of the P630C several enhanced features and changes on existing
features have been included. These are described with reference to the technical
manuals listed below.
References
Released Version Documentation
28.06.2004 P630C -301 -401 -601 Technical Manual
P630C/EN M/B11
(AFSV. 12.09380 D)
U-4 P630C/EN AD/C21 // AFSV.12.10301 D /// P630C-301-401-602

(continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
P630C-301-401-601-701 Hardware No changes
Release: 28.06.2004 Diagram No changes
Software
COMM1 Update of the communication software to SW version 3.14

(see (002 102) D E V I C E : S W v e r s i o n c o m m u n i c . ).
F_KEY Bug fixing:
In the 'Switch' operating mode the set function was again reset when the
return time for the function keys (003 037) had elapsed.
When the "Read Key" was configured to 'Without function' -
(080 110) L O C : F c t . R e a d k e y = Without function -
an interrupt error would occur if the "Read Key" (log key) was pressed
after switching a function key.
DIFF Changes with the saturation discriminator function implemented in
P63x-605 modular devices were adopted.
P630C-301-401-601-702 Hardware No changes
Software
DIFF Changes with the saturation discriminator function implemented in

P63x-606 modular devices were adopted.
DTOC2 Bug fixing:
Once the signal at (036 167) D T O C : S t a r t i n g I n e g > > > had been
issued it could not be reset any more. Therefore it would be present in a
fault recording even if there was no negative-sequence current flowing at
the time.
This signal error did in no way influence the correct starting or tripping of
this particular negative-sequence current stage.

(continued)
Version Changes
P630C-301-401-602 Hardware No changes
Software
LOC The previous English text for the menu point at (003 020) has been
changed to L O C : L a n g u a g e .
COMM1 Bug fixing in the MODBUS protocol:
The analog current channels can now be read.
Names of manufacturers AREVA and AREVA_D have been added.
COMM2 With the new parameter (103 203)
C O M M 2 : P o s i t i v e a c k n . F a u l t it is now possible to set whether
or not faults can be acknowledged positively after transmission (and
consequently deleted from the fault overview at the COMM2/PC
interface).
The default setting for parameter
(103 177) C O M M 2 : S p o n t a n . s i g . e n a b l e has been changed to
'None'. This setting must be selected when spontaneous signals are to
be polled non-cyclically at communication interface COMM2.
Names of manufacturers AREVA and AREVA_D have been added.
OUTP Bug fixing:
The test function for output relays may now be used; available output
relays can be selected at the address
(003 042) O U T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f . t e s t .
LOC Two menu jump lists may now be configured. These menu jump lists
MAIN make it possible to select individual menu points (i.e. set values,
counters, triggering functions, event logs) in a freely definable sequence.
(030 238) L O C : F c t. m e n u j m p l i s t 1
(030 239) L O C : F c t. m e n u j m p l i s t
MAIN Bug fixing:
Measured data for currents in phase C could be given incorrectly when
operating at fnom = 60 Hz.

(continued)
Version Changes
MAIN The reset functions have been extended:
• There are now two group resetting parameters available which
each allow several memories to be cleared at the same time.
The assignment of the relevant memories to the two group
resetting parameters can be configured. Group resetting is then
also available for manual resetting from the local control panel
and, as an alternative, it can also be mapped to a binary signal
input or a function key.
• Similarly to this, the "CLEAR" key on the local control panel may
be assigned a selection of memories to be cleared. Any
pressing of the "CLEAR" key will not only result in the usual
resetting of the LEDs and clearing of the LCD but the selected
memories will also be cleared immediately.
Synchronization of date and time may now be checked with these new
parameters:
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync (103 210)
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync (103 211)
MAIN: Time sync. time-out (103 212)
The previous description text used for the menu point [010 049]
M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d (values: Clockwise rotation or Anti-clockwise
rot.) has been changed for conformity with other devices to
M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e (values: A - B - C, A - C - B).
MAIN The negative- and the positive-sequence current (for ends a and b, and
as primary quantities as well as derived quantities) are now available as
new measured operating data together with the associated enabling
parameters.
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg (011 048)
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ipos (011 058)
PSS Bug fixing:
Time tags for a signal that was entered into the operating data memory
and a spontaneous signal, transferred via COMMx using the protocol per
IEC 60870-5-103, differed when an other parameter subset was
selected.
SFMON Bug fixing in the data model:
The addresses (097 000) S F M O N : D e f e c t . m o d u l e s l o t 1
(i.e. processor module) and (097 001) S F M O N : D e f e c t . m o d u l e
s l o t 2 (i.e. I/O module) are now no longer signaled with the default
setting 'Yes'.
These unused signals have been deleted:
(098 000) S F M O N : M . c . b . t r i p V ,
(098 036) S F M O N : C T A e r r o r T H R M 1 ,
(093 120) S F M O N : I n v . i n p . f . c l o c k s y n c

(continued)
Version Changes
SFMON The parameter (093 120) S F M O N : I n v . i n p . f . c l o c k s y n c has
been deleted.
The new parameter (021 018) S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n
specifies for what length of time monitoring signals will remain stored in
the monitoring signal memory before they are cleared.
In the course of platform harmonization the configuration table of the
alarm condition has been supplemented by the instantaneous outputs
30..32 and the timed outputs 30...32 (t) of the programmable LOGIC:
098 053 S F M O N : Output 30 ↔ 042 090 L O G I C : Output 30
098 054 S F M O N : Output 30 (t) ↔ 042 091 L O G I C : Output 30 (t)
These LOGIC outputs are included in the list of warning signals by

selection at (021 030) S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g and they
can also be recorded in the monitoring signal memory.
With these signals it is also possible to create an alarm signal under
complex application conditions. This signaling has no influence on the
device's operation (i.e. no warm restart or blocking).
FT_RC Bug fixing:

If the time measurement window used to calculate the measured fault
value was positioned at the beginning of the fault (for instance because
the highest differential current value was measured at that time during
energizing) an incorrect indication could occur at
(004 199) F T _ R C : R u n t i m e t o m e a s . = 'Not measured'.
DIFF Additional harmonics monitoring of the differential current was added to
the saturation discriminator.
THRM1 Bug fixing:
Incorrect scaling values were used with the measured value in the data
model at (004 205) T H R M 1 : O b j e c t t e m p . p . u . 1 (e.g. 0.01
instead of 0.001). The device displayed values incorrectly by a factor of
10, and values below -4 °C or above 30 °C were not displayed at all as
the values range limits were not calculated correctly.

(continued)
2 Operation
2.1 Local Control Panel (Function Group LOC)
Function keys on the front

panel user interface (HMI)
The local control panel is fitted with four freely-configurable function keys. Either a
single function, one of the two group resetting functions or one of the two menu jump
lists may be assigned to each of these function keys with the setting parameter
F _ K e y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F4).
With the example for function key F1 the operation is demonstrated in the figure in
section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY). Function key F1 is
enabled only after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d
f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has been entered the function
key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s .
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is
valid for function keys F2 to F6.
Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section
"Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" and section "Resetting
Mechanisms".
Note: There is an LED indicator next to each of the four function keys. As the other LED
indicators, these are freely configurable and they are independent of the configuration of
the function keys.
Configuration of the
READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from
the same menu jump list at L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y . They are triggered in sequence by
repeated pressing of the "READ" key.
Configuration of the
CLEAR key ('C')
Similarly to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions
may be selected from a list at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y . These are carried out by
pressing the "CLEAR" C key.

(continued)
2.2 Serial Interfaces
2.2.1 Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3)
Monitoring the quality of

the communication link
With each new telegram received InterMiCOM determines the proportion of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages. The result is provided as an updated
measured operating value at C O M M 3 : N o . t e l . E r r o r s p . u . and also as a
maximum value at C O M M 3 : N o . t . e r r . , m a x , s t o r e d .
By setting a threshold value at C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s a corresponding
signal can be issued at C O M M 3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . and also at
S F M O N : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . In addition corrupted messages are counted at
(C O M M 3 : N o . t e l e g r a m e r r o r s ). It is possible to jointly reset the maximum value
and the event counter by using the triggering parameter at
C O M M 3 : R s e t . N o . t l g . e r r . U S E R and the binary signal C O M M 3 : R e s e t
No.tlg.err.EXT.

(continued)
2.3 Main Functions of the P630C (Function Group MAIN)
2.3.1 Operating Data Measurement
Positive- and negative-

sequence currents
Positive- and negative-sequence currents from all ends (primary and per-unit values) are
continuously calculated and displayed as measured operating data.
z: End a z: End b
MAIN: Current Ineg z prim. 005 125 005 129
M AIN : C u r r e n t Ip o s z p r i m . 005 127 005 134
MAIN: Current Ineg z p.u. 005 126 005 130
M AIN : C u r r e n t Ip o s z p .u . 005 128 005 135
When the CB's contacts are open, it is also possible to force to zero the setting of small
positive- and negative-sequence current measured values if such measured values are
below additionally created settable thresholds.
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg 011 048

M AIN : M e a s .va l u e r e l . Ip o s 011 058

(continued)
2.3.2 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
Synchronization source
The P630C protection device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock:
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full
time)
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
o IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
o Impulse every minute via a binary signal input (MAIN), see Figure 3-38 in the
complete operating manual and associated text on page 3-52.
With older device versions these interfaces were of equal priority, i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out irrespective of the source. No conflicts have to be taken
into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master, IRIG-B and
minute impulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the synchronization
sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock
may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so
as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while the SCADA
communication is out of service.
As of the currently available device versions a primary source and a backup source for
time of day synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options
listedabove.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set at
M A I N : T i m e s y n c . t i m e - o u t . The backup source is used when there is no
synchronization generated by the primary source after M AIN : T i m e s yn c . ti m e - o u t
has elapsed.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.

(continued)
2.3.3 Resetting Mechanisms
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following mechanisms are available:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the
displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the
fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel
LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the front panel user interface
(HMI). By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further
memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is
pressed.
Selective resetting, e.g. fault memories only, from the local control panel. (For this
example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to
'Execute', see also the exact step-by-step description in Chapter 6 "Local Control",
section 'Reset'.)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 .)
Group resetting from the local control panel, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to
parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured to one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is

assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to
include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g.
O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition
(L O C : F c t . F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y .
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
≥1 MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115 A_EN
3-1 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel

(continued)
LOC: Reset key OP_RC: Reset record.

active & ≥1 EXT
310 024 [ 005 213 ]
LOC: Fct. reset

key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset record.

EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group
reset 1 USER
[ * ]
0
1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset 1
[ * ]
m out of n
x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.

reset 1 USER reset 1 EXT assign. reset 1
OP_RC: Reset record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249
12Z61RMB_EN
3-2 "CLEAR" key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the
reset signal [005 213] OP_RC: Reset record. EXT); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
- [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
- [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT
- [005 213] OP_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT
- [006 054] COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT
- [039 122] THRM1: Reset replica EXT
- [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
- [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
- [065 001] MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT

(continued)
2.4 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart (see the complete operating manual, section
'Self Monitoring' and description of device behavior with problems in Chapter 10
"Troubleshooting"). Whether or not this measure will suffice can only be determined if
the monitoring signal has not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory
because of a previous fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then,
depending on the type of fault detected, the device will be blocked after the second
warm restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at

S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n is applied. This parameter may either be set to
blocked or to a time duration period (in hours).
The default for this timer stage is blocked e.g. blocking of the protection device with two
identical faults always occurs independent of the time evolved since the first fault
monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the
monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. To defuse
this problem it is suggested to set the function parameter to a specific time duration
period so that the device will be blocked only if the same fault occurs again within this
time period. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart.

time tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.

(continued)
3 Settings
The following menu points (as compared to software version -601) have been changed
or added.
3.1 Parameters
3.1.1 Device Identification
Device DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
DVICE: PCS Order No. 001 200
Order numbers for the device.
3.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Local control panel LOC: Fct. reset key 005 251
Selection of such counters and protocols that are to be reset when the
"CLEAR" key is pressed.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Positive ackn. fault 103 203
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be positively acknowledged

after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
Function keys F_KEY: Function assignm. F1 080 112
F_KEY: Function assignm. F2 080 113
Function assignment to function keys. Either a single function or a menu

jump list may be selected. Both menu jump lists are assembled at
L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).
Main function MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync 103 210
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync 103 211
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AIN : T i m e s yn c . ti m e - o u t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out 103 212
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary

source.

(continued)
3.1.3 Function Parameters
3.1.3.1 Global
MAIN: Phase sequence 010 049
Setting for the phase sequence: A-B-C or A-C-B.(Alternative terminology:

Setting for the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise.)
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg 011 048
negative-sequence current to be displayed as a measured operating value.
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ipos 011 058
positive-sequence current to be displayed as a measured operating value.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 005 248
Assigning such memories and counters that are to be reset as a group

when M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 1 U S E R is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2 005 249
Assigning such memories and counters that are to be reset as a group

when M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 2 U S E R is activated.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention 021 018
This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the

monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.

(continued)
The following menu points (as compared to software version -601) have been changed
or added.
4.1 Operation
4.1.1 Cyclic Values
4.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Main function MAIN: Current Ineg a prim. 005 125
MAIN: Current Ineg b prim. 005 129
Display of the negative-sequence current of end a or b as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Current Ipos a prim. 005 127
MAIN: Current Ipos b prim. 005 134
Display of the positive-sequence current of end a or b as a primary quantity.
4.1.1.2 Logic State Signals
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT 006 054
Main function MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209
MAIN: Group reset 2 EXT 005 252
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT 005 210 2

MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT 005 211
MAIN: General reset EXT 005 255
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT 040 138
Self-monitoring SFMON: Output 30 098 053
SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 054
SFMON: Output 31 098 055
SFMON: Output 32 098 057
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 213
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 240
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 241
Fault recording FT_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 243

(continued)
4.1.2 Control and Testing
Communication interface 3 COMM3: Rset.No.tlg.err.USER 120 037
Main function MAIN: General reset USER 003 002

All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event Counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section 'Password-Protected
Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER 003 007
The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER 003 033
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.

MAIN: Group reset 1 USER 005 253
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER 005 254
Group reset commands
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. USER 100 001
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 008
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset record. USER 100 003
Reset of the overload memory.
Fault recording FT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 006

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values

Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P630C/EN AD/C21 Version: -602 11/2010
MiCOM P630C
P630C/EN AD/A31
(AFSV.12.11010 D)
Version P630C -301 -401 -602

⇒ P630C -301 -401 -603
Upgrade Documentation
P630C, Changes in software version -602 to -603
In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Device MiCOM P630C,
several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included.
These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
References
Released Version Documentation
28.06.2004 P630C -301 -401 -601 Technical Manual
P630C/EN M/B11
(AFSV.12.09380 D)
06.06.2008 P630C -301 -401 -602 Upgrade Documentation
P630C/EN AD/C21
(AFSV.12.10301 D)
P630C/EN AD/A31 // AFSV.12.11010 D /// P630C-301-401-603 3

P630C, Changes in software version -602 to -603
(continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
P630C-301-401-603 Hardware New Schneider-Electric design for the local control panel (HMI).
Diagram No change
Release: 09.02.2011 Software
PC The following menu point has been removed:
P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183)
Note:
Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program
continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may
now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private
and Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS
implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices.
The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of
the MODBUS protocol.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1, The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161)
COMM2 and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer
be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may
now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it
may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default.
Notes:
These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel
(HMI).
The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding
this will be truncated.
The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden
unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
Bug fixing:
An incorrect INF code was used to signal
M A I N : R e s e t i n d i c a t . U S E R with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
4 P630C/EN AD/A31 // AFSV.12.11010 D /// P630C-301-401-603

Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P630C/EN AD/A31 // AFSV.12.11010 D /// P630C-301-401-603 06/2011
Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P630C/EN M/B31 Version: -601 -602 -603 11/2011

Micom P630C: Transformer Differential Protection Device

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P630C: Transformer Differential Protection Device

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P630C: Transformer Differential Protection Device

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P630C

Transformer Differential Protection Device

Version P630C -301 -401 -601

Content P630C/EN M/C11 (-601)

Transformer Differential Protection Device

Version P630C -301 -401 -601

! are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 7

8 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

3.19 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) 3-81

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 9

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

6 Local Control Panel 6-1

10 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 11

1 Application and Scope

! Three-system differential protection

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 1-1

! Parameter subset selection

Inputs and outputs

1-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

! Local control panel

! One InterMiCOM guidance interface designed for real-time signal transmission

One channel of the communication interfaces is designed to conform either to

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 1-3

COMM1: “Logical“ communication interface 1

1-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

2.2 General Data

General device data

Dimensions and Connections

IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-1

Other Inputs and Outputs (X1 and X3):

Creepage Distances and Clearances

2.3.1 Type Tests

1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test

Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

2-2 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11

Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5§ or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4.

Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11 2-3

Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

2.3.2 Routine Tests

All tests per EN 60255-6§ or IEC 255-6

Additional Thermal Test

2.4 Environmental Conditions

2.5 Inputs and Outputs

2-4 P630C-301-401-601 / P630C/EN M/B11